Bromma EH5U Eng 00

Operations manual
for
BROMMA TELESCOPIC SPREADER
TYPE: EH5U
General assembly drawing No: 1043059
Serial number:15487
SWL: 41 tonne
Customer:Pt.Emitraco Inustama Mandiri / BICT
Date of shipping: 2012
_____________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
00 01 ENG
rev. .x
Warning!
This Operations manual is intended as a guide to the use and maintenance of
Bromma spreaders.
READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS

PLACED INTO OPERATION!
Bromma Conquip AB or its affiliated - companies (to the extent permitted

by law) accept no liability for loss or damage suffered as a result of the use
of this manual.
If in doubt always refer to the original equipment manufacturer.
Refer at all time to the Safety precautions under section 5!
DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The
Safe Working Load is found on the nameplate that is permanently affixed
to the side frame of the spreader.
__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
00 02 ENG
rev.
Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION
2 SPREADER DATA SHEET
3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION SPREADER
Functional description
Design calculations
Safety features
In-plant testing
4 TESTING RECORDS AND CERTIFICATE
5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6 START-UP PROCEDURES
7 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Maintenance instructions
Periodic maintenance procedure
Lubrication instructions
Instructions for adjustment and repairs of major items
8 SPARE PARTS AND SERVICE
Spare parts list by major groups
How to order spare parts and/or service
9 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
10 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS
11 FAULT FINDING DIAGNOSTICS
Hydraulic system
Electrical system
12 APPENDICES
Units and conversion tables
Hydraulic symbols
Electrical symbols
_________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA
00 03 ENG
rev.01
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
1 Introduction
BROMMA Conquip has since 1967 been the leading manufacturer of
telescopic container handling spreaders. A great number of BROMMA
spreaders are in service today in ports and terminals around the world.
A complete range of fixed length and telescopic spreaders are available,
and each one provides high handling efficiency, excellent reliability,
ease of maintenance and repair.
This Operation Manual describes the many features of the
BROMMA spreader. It will guide you in:
Maintenance.
Repairs.
Trouble-shooting.
Service.
Spare parts.
In the event You should need additional information or support, our

sales and/or technical staff will be pleased to assist you.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
01 01 ENG
rev.
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
2 Spreader - Datasheet
Type
EH5U
Art.nr:
1043059
Container Range
20- 40
Capacity
Lifting capacity (evenly loaded)
Lifting capacity (10% gravity point off set)
Lifting lug capacity (end beam)
Lifting lug capacity (main beam)
41 tonne
41 tonne
4 x 10 tonne
4 x 10 tonne
Operating Movements
Telescoping
20 to 40 or 40 to 20
Twistlock rotation locking or unlocking 90o
30 s
1,5 s
Electrical Equipment
Power voltage
Frequency
Control voltage
Control valve
Total power consumption
Electrical protection
400/ AC
50/ Hz
230 V AC
24 V DC
2x2,2+3+5,5=12,9 kW
IP 65
Hydraulic Equipment
Pump running pressure
Pump flow
Tank capacity
Normal running temperature
Filter type
100 bar
2x15 l/min
2 x 50 l
50 C
10 m
Filter
Pressure line
10 m
Corrosion protection
All surfaces are grit blasted
Interzink 72 EPA 069/073 (Interzink 72 EPA 069/073)
Intervinux VL-Serie
(Intervinux VL-Serie)
Intervinux VS-Serie
(Intervinux VS-Serie)
Min. coating thickness, total
SA 2.5
40 m
100 m
60 m
200 m
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
02 01 ENG
rev..1
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
3 Technical description
Functional description
Bromma telescopic spreader EH5 (EH12 & EH170) are fabricated as all
welded, high quality steel, construction. Two pairs of telescopic beams slide in
the centre main frame construction. The telescopic beams are joined together
at the ends by end beams, which house the twistlocks, flipper arms and
hydraulic valves.
The spreader has an inbuilt under clearance of 185 mm. This enables
hatchcovers and containers with protrusions up to 185 mm to be handled. If
larger clearances are required then overweight extension legs need to be fitted.
The spreader is optionally fitted with one set of lifting lugs. Mostly, they are
placed at each corner of the gable end. In case the spreader is provided with
this device, it can be used for handling of badly damaged containers or noncontainerised cargo.
Use only approved slings and shackles.
Where the telescopic arms slide in the mainframe they are supported by a
number of low friction slides plates, one at each corner of the mainframe (total
4) and on the top and bottom at the end on each telescopic arm (total 8).
Sufficient clearance is provided between the slide plates and the structure to
allow the beams to flex, enabling distorted containers to be handled.
The spreader function (i.e. twistlocks, flippers, telescoping) is operated from the
drivers controls in the crane cab.
TELESCOPIC SYSTEM
The telescoping system is driven by means of an electric motor and reduction
gearbox connected to an endless chain. This chain is titted with stacks of spring
washers that work as chock absorbers where the chain attaches to the tension
rods.. These tension rods are connected to the end beam. The springs allow for
changes in the length of the spreader up to plus or minus 7 mm . The springs
do not only act as shock absorbers; they also provide a floating possibility for
the twistlocks to handle distorted containers. This "floating" action also
eliminates the need for corner guide rollers.
In the event of a power failure the telescoping motion can be handcranked.
The positioning system works with proximity switches for positioning the
spreader in the 20', 30' and 40' positions. This system enables the positioning of
the twistlocks with an accuracy of plus or minus
3 mm (less than 1/8"). The drive motor incorporates an electric brake that is
spring applied and takes electrical power to release.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1 of 3
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 08 ENG.
rev. x
This brake not only controls the accuracy in stopping the expansion and
retraction but also prevents changes from occurring in the spreader length
during use.
TOWER
The main frame of the spreader is connected to the crane through a sliding
tower assembly. This enables the centre of gravity lifting point to be moved a
maximum of 1,2 meters toward each end of the spreader. This means that
unevenly loaded containers can be picked up horizontally, which is specially
important when loading or unloading in the guides in the ships cells. After
unlocking an unevenly loaded container, the sliding tower assembly
automatically returns to the central position
FLIPPERS
Flat gather guides, commonly called flippers, are fitted to each end beam of the
spreader. They are of strong construction and are driven by a powerful
hydraulic motor, which enables easy and fast location of the spreader onto the
containers. The flipper gather is 155 mm and has a gathering torque of
1200 Nm. The flipper arms are always under pressure and each arm has a
shock relief valve, which opens at a pre-set pressure of 45 bar above the
normal working pressure. As soon as the shock load ends the flipper returns to
the vertical position.
Each flipper is controlled by its own solenoid valve and shock relief valve. The
flippers work in pairs along the length of the spreader, individually at the gable
ends, or all together.
The speed of the flipper is approximately 180 in 6 seconds and is
controlled by an orifice plug in the pipe connection to the motor.
TWISTLOCK
Four twistlocks for single container spreader are located in the corners of the
spreader to engage and lift the container. A hydraulic cylinder rotates the
twistlock and two sensors indicate the position of the twistlock, Locked or
Unlocked.
A landing pin safety system is provided to assure that the spreader is properly
landed on the container before rotating the twistlocks.
A spring loaded landing pin near each twistlock is pushed up into the twistlock
housing when the spreader is landed on the container. When the spreader is
properly landed on a container, the landing pin will activate a proximity switch.
Only when all the corners of the spreader are landed, can the twistlocks be
turned. At the same time, the blockading key is moved high enough so the
blockading stop on the twistlock lever arm passes underneath it. If the spreader
is not properly landed the proximity switch will not be activated and the
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2 of 3
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 08 ENG.
rev. x
blockading key will get in the way of the blocking stop. This will stop the
twistlocks from turning.
SIGNAL LIGHT
Near each end of the spreader mainframe there is a set of three signals light,
one green, one red, one white, which can be clearly seen from the crane cabin.
The green and red lights indicate if corresponding twistlocks are unlocked or
locked respectively. The white light indicates when the spreader is properly
"landed", and the twistlocks are correctly engaged in the container corner
castings.
HYDRAULIC UNITS
The hydraulic units are protected inside each end beam. The unit consists of a
built-in tank, variable displacement piston pump, motor valves and filter. The
filter cap is fitted with a pressure relief valve plus or minus 0,14 bar to allow
expansion and contraction of air inside the tank.
The hydraulic components used are designed to work at over 200 bar but
normal working pressure is 100 bar. The hydraulic valves are solenoid
operated and can be tested by hand operating.
MAIN ELECTRICAL CABINET
The main electrical cabinet is mounted on heavy-duty rubber shock absorbers
and is well protected being placed on the tower. Relays, transformers, circuit
breakers, timers, hour counters and sockets are mounted in this cabinet. The
PLC is also placed on the tower. A junction box including motor protectors is
placed inside the main frame.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
3 of 3
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 08 ENG.
rev. x
Design calculations
The spreader structure is designed according to DIN15018 and to the
following loading group which represents a container handling crane.
HOISTING GROUP H2
LOADING GROUP B4
LIFTING CASES
The following lifting cases are considered:
1. Most frequent load case
A symmetrically loaded container of 41 tonne. The permissible stress is
determined by analysis of direct loading and fatigue conditions. Depending
on intensity of use the structure is suitable for:
2 X 106 lifting cycles
"H load case is determining.
2. Exceptional load cases
Permissible stresses are determined by analysis of direct loading only.
a) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in the
longitudinal direction.
"H.Z" load case is determining.
b) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in
the longitudinal and lateral direction.
"H.S" load case is determining
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 02 ENG
rev. x
Safety features
The following safety features are normally included in the crane:
1. The spreader should only be hoisted/lowered when all four twistlocks are
fully locked/unlocked.
2. The spreader twistlocks should be locked/unlocked when the spreader is
Properly "landed" on a container. This being when all four landing switches
are actuated.
3. A delay feature on the twistlocks locked/unlocked circuit is installed to
ensure the spreader is properly "landed" and not bouncing. This is in the
form of a timer whom is adjustable, but normally set to between 1 and 2
seconds.
4. During hoisting the four blockading pins move to the "down" position.
This prevents electrically the twistlocks from moving.
NOTE ! When carrying out maintenance on the twistlocks, the blockading pin clamps can
be fitted to each corner, to by pass the electric and mechanical blockading when running
the twistlock.
5. Telescoping of the spreader is prevented unless all four blockading pins

are in the "down" position and the twistlocks are unlocked.
Individual switches indicate twistlocks locked, twistlocks unlocked and
blockading pins "up".
The following safety features are fitted on the spreader:
6. A mechanical blockading device prevents each twistlock from locking/
unlocking unless the blockading pin is "up" position.
__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 03 ENG
rev.
In-plant testing
STRUCTURAL
Each spreader is fully proof tested in the factory to a minimum of 50%
overload prior to delivery. The proof test loading report enclosed illustrates the
loads applied to the spreader.
All lifting lugs are also proof tested in the factory.
The testing is witnessed and certified by a third part inspection official.
All spreader twistlocks are individually proof tested, stamped and certified to a
loading of 37 tonne.
FUNCTIONAL
Each spreader is run in the factory prior to delivery being controlled by a
specially designed simulator.
__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 04 ENG
rev. x
4 Testing records and certificates
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
04 01 ENG
rev.
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
5 Safety precautions
Warnings
READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PUT

INTO OPERATION.
The manual contains vital information for the safety of personnel and the
correct use of the spreader.
Bromma Group will not accept any liability for the use of the spreader for
any purposes outside what is described in the manual.
DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The Safe
Working Load is shown on the nameplate that is permanently affixed to the
side frame of the spreader.
Safety precautions
1. The spreader shall be operated and serviced only by authorized
personnel.
2. The spreader must only be used for the purpose for which it is
designed.
3. DO NOT change system settings and functions.
4. Perform a functional test after any maintenance or repair work.
5. Stay clear of the spreader when in operation.
6. Stay clear of all moving parts, such as guide arms (flippers), moving
beams, telescopic chains, etc. A safe distance is 5 meters.
7. DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while the power is
on.
8. DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once adjusted by
qualified personnel. See chapter 9. Hydraulic system for proper
pressure adjustment.
9. DO NOT unlock the spreader while a container is suspended in the air. It
could cause personnel injury or property damage.
1 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
05 01 ENG
rev.. x
10. Maintain adjustment of all electrical and hydraulic components

11. Inspect the spreader for damage daily.
12. Care must be taken when performing any maintenance inside the
spreader frame. It must be carried out under extreme caution and by
personnel familiar with risks related to spreader function and
movements. Serious injury by crushing can occur
13. Contact Bromma Conquip AB before doing any repair work on the
spreader apart from replacing normal wear parts.
14. DO NOT walk or stand beneath the spreader bar during operation.
15. DO NOT attempt to lift a container that is not level (+/- 5).
16. DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair or
adjustment. Never put any body extremity beneath the spreader bar.
17. NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD.
18. DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container, whether laden
or empty, by hand or by tagline.
19. DO NOT stand between a container and any construction that many
prevent your movement to safety. A definite hazard exists that could
cause serious injury or death by being crushed between the container
and an obstruction (such as a building or another container).
20. Mobile work platforms which are used in repair and service work on the
spreader must be equipped with safety rails and kick plates.
21. It is incumbent on the operator in charge of the crane to restrict the
movements of the crane when repair or service work is being performed
on crane-mounted spreader.
22. The tower must be moved back to the centre of the spreader before it
leaves the container. There must be a good clearance between the
Spreader and the container before slewing the crane boom.
23. When welding might be needed on the spreader with SCS2 assembled,
make sure that it is properly grounded or dismantle the plug connection
and earth cable.
2 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
05 01 ENG
rev.. x
WARNING!
Because this spreader is equipped with double-coil flipper
arm valves but connected as a single coil valve function,
the following may occur:
If the operating voltage to the flipper arm valves
disappears (intentionally or accidentally), the FLIPPER
ARMS move upwards to their starting position.
If EMERGENCY STOP is used or if the power supply to
the electric motor of the hydraulic power unit is cut of in
some other way, the flipper arms stop immediately. The
flipper arms start moving again when the power supply to
the electric motor of the hydraulic power unit is restored.
It is essential to inform the personnel who work close to
the spreader about this.
_____________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
05 02d ENG.
rev.
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
6 Start - Up procedure
ASSEMBLY OF TOWER (drg no 34476)
1 Check spreader and tower for damage.
2 Suspend the tower from a suitable forklift or crane (tower weight 1,4 t)
using
the main lifting pin (pos 1).
3 Remove the protective material from the robalon pads on tower (pos 2).
Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6).
Remove the (2) lifting lugs from main frame of the spreader at the
assembly end
(pos 3).
5 Lower the flipper arm, at assembly end of the spreader, by slackening
hydraulic hoses on the motor.
NOTE: Take care that flipper does not fall down and cause injury!
6 Remove top fixings for rubber covers (pos 4).
7 Remove lamp assembly by taking out the quick release fastening from
the four pins and lay the lamp assembly in the main frame.
8 Release the gravity point chain, by removing the two screws and the
locking device from adjuster.
9 You are now able to slide the tower into the main frame close to the
centre.
Note the direction of assembly. Arrows are painted on the tower and
frame.
10 Now replace the lamp assembly, rubber covers and lifting lugs. If the
flipper is rise at this time, care should be taken as it is liable to fall, now
that the motor is empty.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
1
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
11 Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6).

It is now possible to install the chain, complete with the anchor block
fitted.
The chain goes, under the first sprocket, over the centre one and under
the third.
To assist with the chain installation, pull the brake release lever, towards
the back of the motor. It is then possible to turn the motor, using the
handle supplied.
12 Replace the chain back into it's fixing point and tighten the adjusting
screws, until the chain is tight (allow a sag of about 30 mm and place the
tower in middle position) and replace the locking device. Grease the chain.
13 Replace sprocket cover.
14 Pass the main plug up through the tower and fix conduit pipes with screws
supplied.
15 Place the cable into the top support clamp.
16 Connect the tower motor. The connections are marked u1 and w1 to give
correct position.
NOTE: Take care, incorrect rotation may result in serious damage!
17 Secure the cable to bracket with suitable cable ties.
18 Fix limit switch detection bar into place (pos 7).
19 Check all bolts are tight and the spreader is clear of all discarded material
and tools. Take care that nothing had fallen into the chain.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
TOWER FUNCTIONS AND TESTING

The tower function is to level/unlevel loaded containers. Any other use of the
tower is an abuse of the equipment and could result in serious damage.
When the spreader is locked onto a container, it is possible to move the tower
in any direction. The tower will stay where it is placed. The return to the middle
position is done by the crane driver. When he has driven the tower to yellow or
blue, it goes always to the middle position.
To test the newly assembled unit, place the blockading pin clamps onto the
spreader and lock the twistlocks. With the spreader on the ground, commence
to travel the tower towards one end of the spreader. Now hold a piece of
metal, i.e. spanner or screwdriver, in front of the stop switch, for the end that
the tower is travelling. The tower should now stop.
Try the other direction. If both of the limits work, travel the tower to both ends
of the spreader, to confirm the limits work on the detection bar. When at each
end, unlock the twistlocks and release a clamp, to confirm the tower returns to
it's centre position. If any of these functions fail, please seek advice.
WARNING!
Use the tower only to level loads, or serious damage may occur!
Never use the hand crank on the motor with power connected, or serious
injury may occur!
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
3
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
Start - Up the spreader

1. Before any connection to container crane, place the main frame of the spreader
on trestles or similar about 0,7 m height and in such a way that the flipper arms
can be lowered.
2 Inspect the spreader for visible damage.
3. Connect the main current and control supply to the spreader. Connect the 24
pin plug to the service panel.
4. Start the electric motor of the hydraulic units by turning the pump on switch on
service panel.
5. For testing of the twistlocks all 4 blockading pins should be in up position. This
is achieved by using a blockading pin clamp. In the down position the
blockading pins electrically and mechanically block all twistlock rotation.
6. Test all functions of the spreader using the push buttons and switches on
service panel.
the
a) When pump on switch is on, both electric motors should be running in gable
ends.
b) Operate the push buttons to put the spreader in the different length positions.
As an additional length, check that the twistlock centre length is marked on
the plate positioned on side of the main beam.
c) Check that the flippers works in pairs along the length of the spreader,
individually at the gable ends, or all together by pressing the appropriate
buttons.
d) Check that when clamps are fitted to the blockading pins and all pins are up,
this will be indicated by the white lights on the spreader.
e) Check that the twistlocks lock/unlock and that the light indicators on the top
of the spreader main frame indicate red when locked and green when
unlocked.
7. Check that the pump operating pressure is 100 bar.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
4
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
8. Check each end hydraulic assembly to ensure there are no oil leaks.
9. Note that the solenoid valves operating flippers and twistlocks can be manually
operated if required.This is achieved by pushing the end of the solenoid with a
small screwdriver. As power is generally always on the solenoid, the plug
connection has to be disconnected first.
10. Service and lubrication should be carried out in accordance with the
lubrication manual.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________
5
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
06 02 ENG
rev.
7 Maintenance procedures
Maintenance Instructions
IMPORTANT!
When the spreader is disconnected from the crane the heating function
(if fitted) must always be connected and energised.
Pos. 1
TWISTLOCK (drg no 22808)

All twistlock are to be greased through the greasecups 4 per spreader.
Pos. 2
TWISTLOCK CYLINDER & BEARING HOUSING IN TOWER (drg no 22808)

Piston rod ends are to be greased. 8 per spreader. Bearing housing in tower.
2 per spreader.
Pos. 3
HYDRAULIC UNIT (drg no 22809)

Oil is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours.
Pos. 4
OIL FILTER (drg no 22809)

Filter is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours of
operation or when the indicator is red.
Pos. 5
LIFTING SHAFTS (drg no 22808)

(If the spreader/headblock is equipped with lifting shafts).
ACTION! To be greased.
Pos. 6
GLIDE PLATE (drg no 22810)

The robalon glide plates are to be replaced when the thickness is down to
17 mm.
ACTION! To be checked.
1 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 05 ENG
rev.3
Pos. 7
GUIDE ARMS (drg no 22808)

Shafts are to greased.
Pos. 8
TELESCOPIC GEARBOX (drg no 22808 & 22809)

Oil level is to be checked through dismantled oil level plug. Bearings at the
gearbox and the pedestal are to be greased through greasecups.
Pos. 9
ALL ROLLER CHAINS AND TENSION WHEEL (drg no 22808)

Roller chains and tension wheel are to be checked from abrasion and greased.
Pos. 10
SIGNAL LAMPS (drg no 22810)

Vibration proof glow lamp.
ACTION! To be checked.
Pos. 11
TELESCOPIC BEAMS (drg no 22808)

To be greased as follows:
1. In 20'- position, through greasenipple underneath the mainframe ca
50g/week.
2. In fully expanded position, with a brush on the sliding area under the
telescopic beams ca 100g/ at interval min.1000 hour. The amount of
grease and service interval depends on spreader use and environmental
circumstances which vary from place to place.
Pos. 12
ELECTRICAL MOTORS (Only for EH5)

Adjust brakes as per attached instructions.
2 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 05 ENG
rev.3
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Quant
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
6
3
1
4
2
1
4
6
3
6
3
1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Title
TWISTLOCK PIN
GUIDE BLOCK
SPHERICAL WASHER
TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY.
TWISTLOCK KEY
NUT
SCREW
SPACER RING
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
BLOCKADING PIN
SPRING
NUT LOCK-KING
WASHER NORD-LOCK
LOCK PIN
GREASE FITTING
SWITCH ATTACH. STD.
SCREW
SWITCH PAD h=10
SCREW
SCREW
BLOCKADING PIECE
NUT
WASHER
BOLTING PLATE
WASHER NORD-LOCK
COVER PLATE DEP4
SENSOR PLATE ASSY. LEFT
1002945
1002945
-
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
Material / Article No.
TWISTLOCK ASSEMBLY
ISO, STD, LEFT
BGS
1002453
48916
43654
1001482
37704
41731
Dwg No.
1000431
1000430
41683
43653
1000434
1000432
sign:
rev:
Art. No.
1000431
1000430
53968
43653
1000434
1000432
1000600
54049
74147
37704
70429
77891
701440
74044
71328
74970
1000596
1001482
1000585
1000587
43654
76460
77798
48916
701433
79850
1002453
PWH
b / SC
M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694

M6S 6x65, Art. No. was 700686
FZB
LOC-KING M8, Art. No. was 75090
BRB 8.4x16x1.6, Art. No. was 75328
FZB
M6, Art. No. was 75268
FZB
FZB
(CA 32/20-100/65)
FZB
SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04
M12, Art. No was 75055
M12, Art. No. was 75295
R.R 3.0
R 1/8"
(SENSOR D=30)
M6S 8x50, Art. No. was 75226
(M39x4-6H)
M6S 8x75, Art. No. was 70165
TYPE 1
Remarks
date
18.2.2005
23.1.2007
Page 1 of 1
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Quant
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
6
3
1
4
2
1
4
6
3
6
3
1
Article No:
Drawing No:
Serial No:
Customer:
Standard:
Title
TWISTLOCK PIN
GUIDE BLOCK
SPHERICAL WASHER
TWISTLOCK ARM, ASSY.
TWISTLOCK KEY
NUT
SCREW
SPACER RING
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
BLOCKADING PIN
SPRING
NUT LOCK-KING
WASHER NORD-LOCK
LOCK PIN
GREASE FITTING
SWITCH ATTACH. STD.
SCREW
SWITCH PAD h=10
SCREW
SCREW
BLOCKADING PIECE
NUT
WASHER
BOLTING PLATE
WASHER NORD-LOCK
COVER PLATE DEP4
SENSOR PLATE ASSY. RIGHT
1002946
1002946
-
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
A4
Material / Article No.
TWISTLOCK ASSEMBLY
ISO, STD, RIGHT
BGS
1002454
48916
43654
1001482
37704
41731
Dwg No.
1000431
1000430
41683
43653
1000434
1000432
sign:
rev:
Art. No.
1000431
1000430
53968
57059
1000434
1000432
1000600
54049
74147
37704
70429
77891
701440
74044
71328
74970
1000596
1001482
1000585
1000587
43654
76460
77798
48916
701433
79850
1002454
PWH
b / SC
M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694

M6S 6x65, Art. No. was 700686
FZB
LOC-KING M8, Art. No. was 75090
BRB 8.4x16x1.6, Art. No. was 75328
FZB
M6, Art. No. was 75268
FZB
FZB
(CA 32/20-100/65)
FZB
SF-TF 4.5x22x90 SS 1774-04
M12, Art. No was 75055
M12, Art. No. was 75295
R.R 3.0
R 1/8"
(SENSOR D=30)
M6S 8x50, Art. No. was 75226
(M39x4-6H)
M6S 8x75, Art. No. was 70165
TYPE 2
Remarks
date
18.2.2005
23.1.2007
Page 1 of 1
A-A
1:5
H:\DWG\A3\A38\38073A.dwg
1 of 2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

RUNNING-IN OF A NEW SPREADER
After 50 and 250 hours
1. Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions.
2. Check the telescopic chain. Tighten if it can be moved more than 25 mm
in vertical direction.
EVERY 100 WORKING HOURS
Nut
1. Twistlock: Check the nut and the floating

mechanism and ensure that all parts are
properly tightened down. Check that the
locking pin can be moved easily and that it
indicates the correct position
(see 'Adjusting the locking pin').
2. Check that all hydraulic tank mountings are tight.
Twistlock pin
3. Check that the hydraulic pump pressure is correct.

4. Carefully inspect all hoses, hose clips and hose connections. Defective
hydraulic hoses and connections may cause personal injury when jets of
liquid escape under high pressure.
5. Leaking hose connections and defective hoses should be rectified
immediately.
EVERY 1000 WORKING HOURS
Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions.
CAUTION! When working on or in the vicinity of the spreader the electrical
supply to the spreader should be disconnected, if possible, to prevent
personal injury and material damage. This can be done using the main switch
or by disconnecting the power cable.
If the work requires that the electrical supply remains connected then staff on
or in the vicinity of the spreader must be informed that it could move.
1 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
TWISTLOCK MAINTENANCE
Every 3000 working hours (100,000 containers handled2 or once annually3)
1. Dismantle all four twistlocks (eight on twin-liftspreaders).
Nut
2. Inspect all parts. Look for any damage which

necessitate their replacement.
Spherical
washer
3. Check that there are no cracks (or other faults)

in the threads of the twistlock pins or 'heads'.
Use penetrating fluid to detect fissures.
4. Replace the twistlock pin if cracks are detected.
Twistlock
pin
5. Clean all parts.

6. Lubricate the parts.
7. Reassemble the twistlocks.
Every 6000 working hours (200,000 containers handled4 or every other

year5)
The twistlock pins and the spherical washers6 shall be replaced.
NOTE. See the twistlock drawing and/or the separate adjustment instructions
for the adjustment of the twistlock end stop switches after reassembly.
-------------------------2
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter

If there is no hour counter or twistlockcounter
4
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter
5
If there is no hour counter or twistlock counter
6
Only for floating twistlocks
3
2 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR

OF MAJOR ITEMS OF THE SPREADER
REPLACING THE HYDRAULIC PUMP
When ordering a new hydraulic pump always state the direction of rotation as
marked on the old pump housing.
To replace the hydraulic pump (free-standing pump unit):
1.Turn off the electrical supply using the main switch.
2. Disconnect the inlet , outlet hoses and drainhoses from the pump.
3. Reconnect the inlet and outlet hoses once the pump has been fitted.
4. Reconnect the drain hose to the pump.
5. See drawing no.45316 for setting the pump flow and pressure.
NOTE. Every time the pump is emptied, new oil must be added until it starts
to run out of the drain hose.
SHOCK RELIEF VALVES, general
These are cross over relief valves which relieves excess hydraulic pressure
caused by external forces on the flipper arms or the telescopic system. The
rising hydraulic pressure acts against the spring to open the flow path to the
other port.
All leakages through these valves at the normal operating pressure of the
pump (lower setting than the pump's operating pressure) cause a substantial
increase in the temperature of the hydraulic oil. Leaks of this type are often
indicated by a hissing sound coming from the relief valve.
Possible causes are:
* Slides jamming due to poor hydraulic oil
* Defective seals
* Incorrect pressure setting
3 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
ADJUSTING THE TELESCOPIC CHAIN

(Drawing no. 38073)
1. Run the spreader to the maximum
position (40 foot).
2. Disconnect the power.
3. Remove the locking screws from
the adjuster nut.
4. Tighten the adjuster nuts on both sides
with a torque wrench to 50 Nm (37 ft-lbs.)
alternately one turn at a time . It is important
to adjust both sides equally. If not done
properly this could cause future problems
in operation and reduce the life of the chain.
5. Reinstall the locking screws in the adjusting nut .
Locking
screws
Adjusting
nut
Cotter pin
Chain lock
REPLACING A BROKEN CHAIN

If the chain should break and jump over the chain wheel, repair as follows:
1. Disconnect the electrical supply in the spreader control cabinet by turning
off the main switch.
2. Place the telescopic beams in the approximate position for a 30 foot
container using a fork lift truck or similar.
3. Turn the adjusting nut counterclockwise a quarter of a turn.
4. Remove the chain pin connected to the shock absorber by pulling out the
cotter pin.
5. Remove the chain.
6. Install a new chain or insert a joining link and reinstall the chain and the
adjusting nut.
7. Perform the steps described above (Adjusting the telescopic chain).
8. Connect the power supply and make a fine adjustment as per the
instructions in 'Setting the spreader length'.
9. Check the distance between the twistlocks as per the instructions in
Spreader lengths with different twistlocks'.
10. Lubricate the chain according to drawing 22808, Lubrication points.
4 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
REPLACING ROBALON PLATES

Robalon plate in main frame
1. Extend the spreader to at least the 30 foot position.
2. Remove the locking plate and replace the Robalon plate.
Telescopic beam lower plates

1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position.
2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic
valves.
3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the
Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible through the aperture in the
lower flange of the main beam. Replace the plates.
Telescopic beam upper plates

1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position.
2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic
valves.
3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the
Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible.
4. Replace the plates.
DISMANTLING THE TELESCOPIC BEAMS AND END BEAM UNIT

If the telescopic beams require checking.
1. Start by removing all the Robalon plates from the ends of telescopic
beams. Leave the plates on the main frame in place.
2. Disconnect the power cables and the hydraulic hoses from the end units.
Seal all hydraulic hoses correctly.
3. Remove the stud from the drawbar connection in the end beam.
4. Take the weight off the end unit using a fork lift truck and extend the unit to
the 40 foot position.
5 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
5. Secure a spacer between the telescopic beams to prevent lateral

movement.
6. Extract the beams from the main frame and inspect them as required.
6. Reassemble the beams and the end units in the reverse order to that in
the instructions above.
FLIPPER ARM UNIT (AUTOMATIC FLIPPER ARMS)

1. Remove the outlet plug to alter flipper arm speed.
NOTE. When replacing the flipper arm motor ensure that the outlet plug is
correctly positioned.
2. Removing and installing bearings
a) Remove the flipper arms
b) Remove the key
c) Drift out the shaft. Once the shaft has been removed the bearing will be
pushed out by the middle key.
d) Drift out the second bearing.
e) Install the parts in the reverse order to dismantle except for that both
bearings have to be drifted into position using a pipe of a suitable bore.
6 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
ADJUSTING SPREADER LENGTH

Sensors:
a) Adjust the centre to centre distance
between twistlocks for each position
by moving the sensors.
b) For 30' check the centre to centre
distance between twistlock both when
extending and retracing the spreader.
The accurate distances between the
twistlocks are shown in Spreader
length with different twistlocks.
Sensor
Sensor
plate
SPREADER LENGTH WITH TWISTLOCKS

BROMMA ISO Twistlock
20'
30'
Floating:
5852
8918
40'
11984
ADJUSTING THE LANDING PIN

a) Attach blockading pin clamps
at three of the corners.
b) At the fourth corner, press the
pin upwards.
c) When the lower part of the pin
is 6 - 7 mm from the bottom plate
of the corner, the lamp indicating
"spreader landed", shall go on.
Landing
switch
d) If the distance is not correct,

adjust the landing switch and
do the test again.
Landing pin
7 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
e) Proceed in the same way for all four corners.

DISMOUNTING THE TWISTLOCK PIN
1. Dismout the twistlock cylinder as
described on the next page.
2. Remove the M6 screw and nut
from the top of the twistlock.
3. Grab hold of twistlock head.
4. Slack off the twistlock nut.
5. Lower the twistlock pin and guide
block.
6. Do not lose the twistlock pin key.
Twistlock
nut
M6 nut
M6 screw
Guide
neck
Twistlock
MOUNTING
housing
1. Perform the steps above in the
Twistlock
head
reverse order.
2. Carry out the adjustment below
3. before mounting the M6 screw and nut.
4. Lubricate according to instructions on drawing 22808, Lubrication points.
Distance between top of twistlock head

and bottom of guide block 1-2 mm
Checking the Float

1. Grab hold of the twistlock head.
2. Push or pull the twistlock to one of the corners.
3. Ensure the guide block is touching the twistlock
housing bottom plate. If not, the twistlock needs to be
adjusted /lowered.
4. If the twistlock is touching the bottom plate, press the
twistlock upwards while holding it in the corner.
5. The twistlock should be moving up slightly. If it
moves a lot, adjust it higher.
6. If the twistlock does not move at all, it needs to be
adjusted down.
Adjusting
1. Remove the M6 screw from the top of the twistlock.
2. To lower the twistlock, loosen the twistlock nut
slightly. To raise the twistlock, tighten the nut.
The distance between the top of twistlock head and the
bottom of guide block 1 -2 mm
3. Recheck the float of the twistlock.
4. Reinstall the M6 screw.
8 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
Twistlock nut
Spherical
washer
Key
Twistlock pin
Twistlock
head
07 02 ENG
rev. x
Removing the Twistlock Cylinder

1. Make sure the power supply is disconnected
and the oil pressure is relieved from the
Split pin
system.
2. Remove the hoses from the cylinder.
3. To avoid oil leakage, thread a plastic bag Spacer
over the end of the hoses and secure
ring
them with straps.
4. Pull out the split pins. Remove the spacer
rings and the cylinder.
Installing the Twistlock Cylinder
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse
order.
2. The hoses must be tightened to 95 Nm
(70 ft-lbs) torque.
3. De-aerate the system by running the
cylinder several times.
Cylinder
Removing Sensors
1. Unscrew the cable connection from
the sensor.
2. Loosen the two screws on the switch
attachment.
3. Remove the sensor.
Installing Sensors
1. Perform the steps above in the reverse
order, using blue Loctite to the cable
connection.
2. The distance between sensor face and
flag is approximately 5-6 mm. Check
the sensor by grabbing the twistlock
head and moving it around in different
positions. If the signal is lost, adjust the
sensor closer to its flag. Make sure the
flag does not come in contact with
the sensor.
9 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
Sensor
Signal
cable
connection
07 02 ENG
rev. x
Checking the tower motor brake

1. Disconnect the power.
2. Remove the crank from its stowed position in the tower.
3. Install the crank at the rear end of the
tower motor.
4. Place a torque wrench in the socket on the crank
5. Adjust the torque to 65 Nm.
6. If the torque wrench releases as the 65 Nm torque is
reached, the brake adjustment is OK. If it does not release and
the motorshaft rotates, the brake must be adjusted.
See Inspection and maintenance of BGM8 Tower motor
at the end of this section.
Tower
motor
Crank
65 Nm
Torque
wrench
10 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG
rev. x
Bromma Manual
Important tightening torques EH5/EH170

Tower and
main frame
331Nm
165Nm
331Nm
331Nm
331Nm
End beam
68Nm
6.5 Nm
40Nm
Telescopic motor
EH5 / EH170
Telescopic motor
EH5U / EH170U
331Nm
40Nm
331Nm
7-1- Febr. 10 rev.01
Bromma Conquip
Bromma Manual
Limit switch box

EH5 / EH170
91Nm
Twistlock
EH5 / EH170
Twistlock
EH5U / EH170U
100 Nm
95 Nm
91Nm
Flipper motor and gearbox

165Nm
after 200
test
cycles
331Nm
56Nm
103Nm
after 200
test cycles
Bromma Conquip
7-2- Febr
. 10 rev.01
Inspection and maintenance periods
Inspection and Maintenance
8.1
Inspection and maintenance periods

Equ ipm ent/com po nen ts
Frequency
BMG4 =Telescopic Motor
Every Year
BMG8 = Tower Motor
Every third month
What to do ?
Inspecting the brake:
Mea sure and set working air gap
brake disc, lining
P ressure plate
C arrier / gearing
P ressure rings
E xtract the ab raded ma tter
Inspect the switch elemen ts and
repla ce if necessary (e.g . in case o f
burn-out)
Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8
8.6
Inspection and maintenance of brake

BMG4 = Telescopic Motor
BMG8 = Tower Motor
9
8
6
5
2
22
21
e
10
b
20
19
a
15
11
12 13
14
16
17
18
Inspecting brake BMG 4 and 8
, setting the working air gap
1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against
un inten tional power -up.
2. Remove the following:
If fitted, forced- cooling fan for
motor and brake maintenance.
F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ).
3. Pu sh the rubber sealing co llar (5) aside.
R elease the clip to do this, if necessary .
E xtract the abr aded ma tter.
4. Measure the brake disc (7 ):
If the brak e d isc is:
9 mm on b rake motors up to size 100 .(BMG4)
10 mm on bra ke motor s up to size 1 12.(BMG8)
Fit a new brake disc ( Section "Ch anging brake disc on BMG
4 and 8
Changing thebrake disk BMG 4 and 8

When fitting a ne w brake disc, in spect the other removed pa rts as well and fit new one s
if nece ss ary
1. Iso late the moto r and brake from the supply,, safeguarding them against
un inten tional power -up.
If fitted, forced coolin g fan
F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19).
3. Rem ove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5 ) an d the ma nual brake release:
S etting nuts ( 18), con ica l coil sp rings (1 7), studs (16), rele ase lever (1 5), dowel
pin (1 4).
4. Unscr ew hex nuts (1 0e ), ca refully pull off the brake co il body (1 2) (brake ca ble!) an d
take out the brak e spr ings (11).
5. Rem ove the dam ping plate (9 ), pres sur e pla te (8) and brake disc (7, 7b) an d cle an
the br ak e com ponents .
6. Fit a ne w brake d isc.
7. Re- install th e br ake comp onents.
E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan and fan guard, se t the working air gap
( Inspe cting brake BMG 4 and 8, settin g the wor king air gap , points 5
through 8)
8. With m anual brake r elease: Use se tting n uts to set the flo ating clear ance "s"
between the conical co il springs (pressed flat) an d the settin g nuts ( following
illustration).
Brak e
BMG 4 and 8
Floa ting clear ance s [mm]

2
Importan t: This flo ating clerance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate
can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not
gu ara nteed.
9. Fit the r ubber sea ling colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.
Note:
T he locka ble man ual brake r elea s e ( type HF) is a lready r elea s ed if a re sistan ce is
encountered whe n ope rating the gr ub scre w.
T he se lf-reengaging manual b rake re lea s e (type HR) ca n be operated with normal
hand pressu re.
Imp ortant: In brake motors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the
manual brake release lever must be removed after startup/maintenance. A bracket
is provided for storing it on the outside of the motor.
Changing Springs
1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against
un inten tional po wer -up.
If fitted, fo rced -cooling fan ,
For motor and brake ma intenance .
F lange cover or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19).
3. Remove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5) an d the ma nual brake release:
s etting nuts (18 ), conical coil sp rings (1 7), studs ( 16) , release le ver ( 15) , dowel
pin (1 4).
4. Unscrew he x nuts ( 10e ), pull o ff the co il body ( 12) .
B y app rox. 50 mm (watch the bra ke ca ble!) .
5. Cha nge
brake springs (11).
P os ition the bra ke sp rings symme trically.

6. Re- install th e br ake components..
E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan an d fan gu ard,
set the wor king air ga p ( Ins pecting brake BMG 4 and 8 setting the
working air gap , points 5 th rough 8)
7. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to s et floating c learance "s" between
the co nical coil springs (pressed fla t) an d the setting nuts ( following illustration.)
Brak e
Floa ting clear ance s [mm]
BMG 4 and 8
Importan t: This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate
can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not
gu aranteed.
8. Fit the rubber sealing colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.
Note
Fit new settingnuts (18) an d hexag on nuts ( 10e ) if the re moval pr oced ure is r epeated!
kVA
i
9.3
Brak e
type
Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4 - 8
P Hz
Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4-8
Fo r
motor size
Work do ne
until
main tenance
[10 6 J]
Workin g air gap

[mm]
min. 1)
0.25
ma x.
Br aking torque se ttings

Br aking
torque
[N m]
Type an d n o. of
springs
Order n umber o f
spr ings
Nor mal
Norma l
Red
Red
0.6
135 150 8 135 151 6

BMG 4
BMG 8
1)
100
112M
132S
40
75
260
600
0.3
1.2
184 845 3 135 570 8
Please note when checking the air gap:

Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may give rice to deviation of 0.1 after
a test run.
A ddres s lis t
C o n t a c t y o u r B R O M M A l o c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i v e o r S E W A ddres s es below.
G ermany
Headquarters
P roduc tion
S ales
S ervic e
B ruc hs al
S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o

E rnst-B lickle-S tra e 42
D-76646 B ruchs al
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 3023 D-76642 B ruchsal
Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0

F ax (0 72 51) 75-19 70
http://www.S E W-E UR ODR IV E .de
s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.de
P roduc tion
G raben

E rnst-B lickle-S tra e 1
D-76676 G raben-Neudorf
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 1220 D-76671 G raben-Neudorf
Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0

F ax (0 72 51) 75-29 70
Telex 7 822 276
A s s embly
S ervic e
G arbs en
(near Hannover)

Alte R icklinger S tra e 40-42
D-30823 G arbs en
P.O. B ox
P os tfach 110453 D-30804 G arbs en
Tel. (0 51 37) 87 98-30

F ax (0 51 37) 87 98-55
s cm-garbs en@ s ew-eurodrive.de
K irc hheim
(near Mnchen)

Domagks tra e 5
D-85551 K irchheim
Tel. (0 89) 90 95 52-10

F ax (0 89) 90 95 52-50
s cm-kirchheim@ s ew-eurodrive.de
L angenfeld
(near Ds s eldorf)

S iemens s tra e 1
D-40764 Langenfeld
Tel. (0 21 73) 85 07-30

F ax (0 21 73) 85 07-55
s cm-langenfeld@ s ew-eurodrive.de
Meerane
(near Zwickau)

Dnkritzer Weg 1
D-08393 Meerane
Tel. (0 37 64) 76 06-0

F ax (0 37 64) 76 06-30
s cm-meerane@ s ew-eurodrive.de
Additional address es for s ervice in G ermany provided on reques t!

F ranc e
P roduc tion
S ales
S ervic e
Haguenau
S E W-US OC OME S AS
48-54, route de S oufflenheim
B . P. 185
F -67506 Haguenau C edex
Tel. 03 88 73 67 00
F ax 03 88 73 66 00
http://www.us ocome.com
s ew@ us ocome.com
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e
B ordeaux
P arc da ctivit s de Magellan
62, avenue de Magellan - B . P. 182
F -33607 P es s ac C edex
Tel. 05 57 26 39 00
F ax 05 57 26 39 09
Lyon
P arc dA f faires R oos evelt
R ue J acques Tati
F -69120 Vaulx en Velin
Tel. 04 72 15 37 00
F ax 04 72 15 37 15
P aris
Zone indus trielle
2, rue Denis P apin
F -77390 Verneuil IE t ang
Tel. 01 64 42 40 80
F ax 01 64 42 40 88
Additional address es for s ervice in F rance provided on reques t!

A rgentina
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e
B uenos A ires
S E W E UR ODR IV E AR G E NT INA S .A.

C entro Indus trial G arin, Lote 35
R uta P anamericana K m 37,5
1619 G arin
Tel. (3327) 45 72 84
F ax (3327) 45 72 21
s ewar@ s ew-eurodrive.com.ar
Melbourne
S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D.
27 B everage Drive
Tullamarine, Victoria 3043
Tel. (03) 99 33 10 00
F ax (03) 99 33 10 03
S ydney
S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D.
9, S leigh P lace, Wetherill P ark
New S outh Wales , 2164
Tel. (02) 97 25 99 00
F ax (02) 97 25 99 05
Wien
S E W-E UR ODR IV E G es .m.b.H.

R ichard-S traus s -S tras s e 24
A-1230 Wien
Tel. (01) 6 17 55 00-0

F ax (01) 6 17 55 00-30
s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.at
A us tralia
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e
A us tria
A s s embly
S ales
S ervic e
Address list
Belgium
Assembly
Sales
Service
Brssel
CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre
Tel. (010) 23 13 11
Fax (010) 2313 36
http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Sao Paulo
SEW DO BRASIL
Motores-Redutores Ltda.
Rodovia Presidente Dutra, km 208
CEP 07210-000 - Guarulhos - SP
Tel. (011) 64 60-64 33

Fax (011) 64 80 33 28
sew@sew.com.br
Brazil
Production
Sales
Service
Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request!

Bulgaria
Sales
Sofia
BEVER-DRIVE GMBH
Bogdanovetz Str.1
BG-1606 Sofia
Tel. (92) 9 53 25 65
Fax (92) 9 54 93 45
bever@mbox.infotel.bg
Toronto
SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD.

210 Walker Drive
Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1
Tel. (905) 7 91-15 53

Fax (905) 7 91-29 99
www.sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver

7188 Honeyman Street
Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2
Tel. (604) 9 46-55 35

Fax (604) 946-2513
Montreal

2555 Rue Leger Street
LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9
Tel. (514) 3 67-11 24

Fax (514) 3 67-36 77
Canada
Assembly
Sales
Service
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request!

Chile
Assembly
Sales
Service
Santiago de
Chile
SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE
Motores-Reductores LTDA.
Panamericana Norte No 9261
Casilla 23 - Correo Quilicura
RCH-Santiago de Chile
Tel. (02) 6 23 82 03+6 23 81 63

Fax (02) 6 23 81 79
Tianjin
SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd.

No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA
Tianjin 300457
Tel. (022) 25 32 26 12
Fax (022) 25 32 26 11
Bogot
SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA.

Calle 22 No. 132-60
Bodega 6, Manzana B
Santaf de Bogot
Tel. (0571) 5 47 50 50
Fax (0571) 5 47 50 44
sewcol@andinet.com
Zagreb
KOMPEKS d. o. o.
PIT Erddy 4 II
HR 10 000 Zagreb
Tel. +385 14 61 31 58
Fax +385 14 61 31 58
Praha
SEW-EURODRIVE S.R.O.
Business Centrum Praha
Lun 591
16000 Praha 6
Tel. 02/20 12 12 34 + 20 12 12 36
Fax 02/20 12 12 37
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Kopenhagen
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Geminivej 28-30, P.O. Box 100
DK-2670 Greve
Tel. 4395 8500

Fax 4395 8509
http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Tallin
ALAS-KUUL AS
Paldiski mnt.125
EE 0006 Tallin
Tel. 6 59 32 30
Fax 6 59 32 31
China
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Colombia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Croatia
Sales
Service
Czech Republic
Sales
Denmark
Assembly
Sales
Service
Estonia
Sales
Address list
Finland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Lahti
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Vesimentie 4
FIN-15860 Hollola 2
Tel. (3) 589 300

Fax (3) 780 6211
Normanton
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
Beckbridge Industrial Estate
P.O. Box No.1
GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR
Tel. 19 24 89 38 55
Fax 19 24 89 37 02
Athen
Christ. Boznos & Son S.A.

12, Mavromichali Street
P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus
Tel. 14 22 51 34
Fax 14 22 51 59
Boznos@otenet.gr
Hong Kong
SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.
Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor
Hong Leong Industrial Complex
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel. 2-7 96 04 77 + 79 60 46 54
Fax 2-7 95-91 29
sew@sewhk.com
Budapest
SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.
H-1037 Budapest
Kunigunda u. 18
Tel. +36 1 437 06 58

Fax +36 1 437 06 50
Baroda
SEW-EURODRIVE India Pvt. Ltd.

Plot No. 4, Gidc
Por Ramangamdi Baroda - 391 243
Gujarat
Tel. 0 265-83 10 86
Fax 0 265-83 10 87
sew.baroda@gecsl.com
Dublin
Alperton Engineering Ltd.

48 Moyle Road
Dublin Industrial Estate
Glasnevin, Dublin 11
Tel. (01) 8 30 62 77
Fax (01) 8 30 64 58
Milano
SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s.

Via Bernini,14
I-20020 Solaro (Milano)
Tel. (02) 96 98 01
Fax (02) 96 79 97 81
Toyoda-cho
SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD

250-1, Shimoman-no,
Toyoda-cho, Iwata gun
Shizuoka prefecture, P.O. Box 438-0818
Tel. (0 53 83) 7 3811-13

Fax (0 53 83) 7 3814
Ansan-City
SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD.

B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate
Unit 1048-4, Shingil-Dong
Ansan 425-120
Tel. (031) 4 92-80 51

Fax (031) 4 92-80 56
master@sew-korea.co.kr
Brssel
CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre
Tel. (010) 23 13 11
Fax (010) 2313 36
http://www.caron-vector.be
info@caron-vector.be
Skopje
SGS-Skopje / Macedonia
"Teodosij Sinactaski
6691000 Skopje / Macedonia
Tel. (0991) 38 43 90
Fax (0991) 38 43 90
Johore
SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD

No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya
81000 Johor Bahru, Johor
West Malaysia
Tel. (07) 3 54 57 07 + 3 54 94 09
Fax (07) 3 5414 04
Great Britain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Greece
Sales
Service
Hong Kong
Assembly
Sales
Service
Hungary
Sales
Service
India
Assembly
Sales
Service
Ireland
Sales
Service
Italy
Assembly
Sales
Service
Japan
Assembly
Sales
Service
Korea
Assembly
Sales
Service
Luxembourg
Assembly
Sales
Service
Macedonia
Sales
Malaysia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Address list
Netherlands
Assembly
Sales
Service
Rotterdam
VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V.

Industrieweg 175
NL-3044 AS Rotterdam
Postbus 10085
NL-3004 AB Rotterdam
Tel. +31 10 44 63 700

Fax +31 10 41 55 552
http://www.vector.nu
info@vector.nu
Auckland
SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.

P.O. Box 58-428
82 Greenmount drive
East Tamaki Auckland
Tel. 0064-9-2 74 56 27
Fax 0064-9-2 74 01 65
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.za
Christchurch
SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD.

10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead
Christchurch
Tel. 0064-3-3 84 62 51
Fax 0064-3-3 85 64 55
sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Moss
SEW-EURODRIVE A/S
Solgaard skog 71
N-1599 Moss
Tel. (69) 2410 20

Fax (69) 2410 40
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Lima
SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES

S.A.C.
Los Calderos # 120-124
Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima
Tel. (511) 349-52 80

Fax (511) 349-30 02
sewperu@terra.com.pe
Lodz
SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o.

ul. Pojezierska 63
91-338 Lodz
Tel. (042) 6 16 22 00
Fax (042) 6 16 22 10
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Coimbra
SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.
Apartado 15
P-3050-901 Mealhada
Tel. (0231) 20 96 70
Fax (0231) 20 36 85
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Bucuresti
Sialco Trading SRL

str. Madrid nr.4
71222 Bucuresti
Tel. (01) 2 30 13 28
Fax (01) 2 30 71 70
sialco@mediasat.ro
St. Petersburg
ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE
P.O. Box 193
193015 St. Petersburg
Tel. (812) 3 26 09 41 + 5 35 04 30
Fax (812) 5 35 22 87
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru
SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD.

No 9, Tuas Drive 2
Jurong Industrial Estate
Singapore 638644
Tel. 8 62 17 01-705
Fax 8 61 28 27
Telex 38 659
Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o.

UI. XIV. divizije 14
SLO 3000 Celje
Tel. 00386 3 490 83 20

Fax 00386 3 490 83 21
pakman@siol.net
New Zealand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Norway
Assembly
Sales
Service
Peru
Assembly
Sales
Service
Poland
Sales
Portugal
Assembly
Sales
Service
Romania
Sales
Service
Russia
Sales
Singapore
Assembly
Sales
Service
Slovenia
Sales
Service
10
Celje
Address list
South Africa
Assembly
Sales
Service
Johannesburg
SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED

Eurodrive House
Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads
Aeroton Ext. 2
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Tel. + 27 11 248 70 00
Fax +27 11 494 23 11
ljansen@sew.co.za
Capetown

Rainbow Park
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road
Montague Gardens
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Cape Town
Tel. +27 21 552 98 20

Fax +27 21 552 98 30
Telex 576 062
Durban

2 Monaceo Place
Pinetown
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Tel. +27 31 700 34 51

Fax +27 31 700 38 47
Bilbao
SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAA, S.L.

Parque Tecnolgico, Edificio, 302
E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya)
Tel. 9 44 31 84 70
Fax 9 44 31 84 71
sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Jnkping
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gnejsvgen 6-8
S-55303 Jnkping
Box 3100 S-55003 Jnkping
Tel. (036) 34 42 00
Fax (036) 34 42 80
www.sew-eurodrive.se
Basel
Alfred lmhof A.G.

Jurastrasse 10
CH-4142 Mnchenstein bei Basel
Tel. (061) 4 17 17 17
Fax (061) 4 17 17 00
http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Chon Buri
SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd.

Bangpakong Industrial Park 2
700/456, Moo.7, Tambol Donhuaroh
Muang District
Chon Buri 20000
Tel. 0066-38 21 40 22
Fax 0066-38 21 45 31
sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.co.th
Istanbul
SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti
Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3
TR-81540 Maltepe ISTANBUL
Tel. (0216) 4 41 91 63 + 4 41 91 64 + 3
83 80 14 + 3 83 80 15
Fax (0216) 3 05 58 67
seweurodrive@superonline.com.tr
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Greenville
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
1295 Old Spartanburg Highway
P.O. Box 518
Lyman, S.C. 29365
Tel. (864) 4 39 75 37
Fax Sales (864) 439-78 30
Fax Manuf. (864) 4 39-99 48
Fax Ass. (864) 4 39-05 66
Telex 805 550
Assembly
Sales
Service
San Francisco
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
30599 San Antonio St.
Hayward, California 94544-7101
Tel. (510) 4 87-35 60

Fax (510) 4 87-63 81
Philadelphia/PA
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
Pureland Ind. Complex
200 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Tel. (856) 4 67-22 77

Fax (856) 8 45-31 79
Dayton
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
2001 West Main Street
Troy, Ohio 45373
Tel. (9 37) 3 35-00 36

Fax (9 37) 4 40-37 99
Dallas
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
3950 Platinum Way
Dallas, Texas 75237
Tel. (214) 3 30-48 24

Fax (214) 3 30-47 24
Spain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Sweden
Assembly
Sales
Service
Switzerland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Thailand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Turkey
Assembly
Sales
Service
USA
11
Address list
USA
Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request!
Venezuela
Assembly
Sales
Service
12
Valencia
SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A.

Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319
Zona Industrial Municipal Norte
Valencia
Tel. +58 (241) 8 32 98 04

Fax +58 (241) 8 38 62 75
sewventas@cantr.net
sewfinanzas@cantr.net
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
8 Spare parts and service

Spare parts list by major groups
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
08 01 ENG
rev.
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
12
7
4
5
2
6
3
14
13
10
11
15
16
19
20
8
9
1
18
17
F/N
Name
1041820
2.0 17021
1.0 17023
1.0 23854
1.0 23855
2.0 24142
1.0 24143
1.0 24161
2.0 24169
2.0 34375
2.0 37409
1.0 39047
1.0 39055
1.0 44768
2.0 1001444
1.0 1002656
2.0 1002945
2.0 1002946
1.0 1017506
1.0 1041686
1.0 1041819
Qty
General Assembly, 1041820 rev. Title

GENERAL ASSEMBLY
HYDRAULIC ASSY EH 5
TOWER STD.
TENSION ROD
TENSION ROD
TELESCOPIC BEAM UNIT
FRAME
TOWER
FLIPPER ARM ASS.
PUMP UNIT ASSY.
CABLE CHAIN ASSY.
TOWER CABLE CHAIN
GEARBOX ASSY
GEARBOX ASSY.
LED-PANEL MOUNT. DET.
INPUT MODULE KIT 230VAC
TWISTLOCK ASSYEMBLY
TWISTLOCK ASSYEMBLY
FRAME EH5U
Electrical circuit diagram
DECORATION
Title2
SN: 15216
YSX 40/45E
EH5-EH170
ISO, STD, LEFT
ISO, STD, RIGHT
CANOPEN
EH5U, SN: 15216
-
Specification
1041820 17021 g
17023 b
23854 a
23855 a
24142 24143 b
24161 c
24169 d
34375 f
37409 b
39047 a
39055 b
44768 e
1001444 - 1001444 1002656 a
1002945 c
1002946 c
1017506 - 1017506 1041686 1041819 -
Page - 1
KSI
1/19/12
F/N
Part, 24161 rev. c
Qty
24161
Name
TOWER
Title
-
Title2
24161 c
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
F/N
Qty
Welded Component, 23854 rev. a
23854
Name
Title
TENSION ROD
Title2
23854 a
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
F/N
Qty
Welded Component, 23855 rev. a
23855
Name
Title
TENSION ROD
Title2
23855 a
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
2
3
13
14
1
12
9
11
10
15
4
5
7
6
8
F/N
Frame, 24143 rev. b
24143
1.0 16441
1.0 38073
2.0 38084
1.0 38085
4.0 38861
1.0 38862
1.0 38863
2.0 38864
4.0 43072
4.0 48392
2.0 400242
2.0 400244
4.0 401277
4.0 401279
4.0 401401
Qty
Name
Title
FRAME
TELESC. DRIVE ATT. ASSY.
CHAIN ASSY
SINGLE SENSOR ASSY.
DUAL SENSOR ASSY.
GLIDE PLATE ASSY
PEDESTAL BEARING
TOWER CHAIN ASSY
END BEAM COVER ASSY
LIFTING LUG ASSY.
CLIP
TENSION ROD PIN ASSY.
END STOP ASSY
LANDING BUFFER
20' - STOP ASSY.
FRAME COVER ASSY
Title2
Specification
24143 b
16441 a
38073 c 38073 c
38084 d
38085 d
38861 a
38862 38863 38864 a
43072 d
48392 d 48392 d
400242 a
400244 c 400244 c
401277 401279 b
401401 a
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
F/N
Part, 17023 rev. b
Qty
17023
Name
TOWER STD.
Title
-
Title2
17023 b
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
10
3
8
4
21
24
11
15
14
9
16
22
23
12
26
25
13
2
1
6
5
19
20
17
7
18
27
F/N
Name
1002945
1.0 37704
1.0 53968
2.0 54049
1.0 43653
1.0 43654
3.0 48916
1.0 70429
2.0 71328
2.0 74044
1.0 74147
6.0 74970
4.0 76460
6.0 77798
1.0 77891
3.0 79850
6.0 701081
2.0 701440
1.0 1000430
1.0 1000431
1.0 1000432
1.0 1000434
4.0 1000585
2.0 1000587
3.0 1000596
1.0 1000600
1.0 1001482
1.0 1002453
Qty
Twistlock Assy, 1002945 rev. c

Title
TWISTLOCK ASSYEMBLY
BLOCKADING PIN
SPHERICAL WASHER
SPACER RING
TWISTLOCK ARM ASSY TYPE 1
BLOCKADING PIECE
BOLTING PLATE
SPRING SF-TF 4,5x22x90
GREASE FITTING G1/8 IN
LOCK PIN
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
CLAMP 04-430
NUT LOC-KING M8
WASHER BRB 8,4x16x1,6
NUT LOC-KING M12
COVER PLATE DP4 FZB
WASHER NORD-LOCK M6
WASHER NORD-LOCK M12
GUIDE BLOCK
TWISTLOCK PIN ISO
TWISTLOCK NUT
TWISTLOCK KEY
SCREW M6S 6x55
SCREW M6S 6x65
SCREW M6S 8x50
SCREW M6S 8x75
SWITCH PAD
SENSOR PLATE ASSY
Title2
ISO, STD, LEFT
EH 190/195
27x21x6
HYDRAULIC
ASP 4
SS 1774-04
R.R 3.0
25 CA-32/20-100/85
A4, DIN 985, KLASS 70
A4, ISO 7089
DIN 985, A4, KLASS 70
A4
A4
MACHINED
A4, CLASS 70, ISO 4014
10x30x60
LEFT TWISTLOCK ENDBEAM
Specification
1002945 c
37704 e 37704 e
41683 i 41683 i
41731 b 41731 b
43653 - 43653 43654 b 43654 b
48916 d 48916 d
70429 - 70429 71328 74044 74147 a 74147 a
74970 - 74970 76460 77798 77891 79850 - 79850 701081 701440 1000430 d 1000430 d
1000431 f 1000431 f
1000432 b 1000432 b
1000434 - 1000434 1000585 1000587 1000596 1000600 1001482 - 1001482 1002453 b 1002453 b
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
F/N
Part, 37409 rev. b
Qty
37409
Name
Title
CABLE CHAIN ASSY.
YSX 40/45E
Title2
37409 b
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
1
3
4
2
F/N
Mounting Assy, 39047 rev. a

Name
39047
1.0 38996
4.0 76460
4.0 77798
4.0 1019493
Qty
Title
TOWER CABLE CHAIN
CABLE CHAIN TOWER
NUT LOC-KING M8
WASHER BRB 8,4x16x1,6
SCREW MF6S 8x35
Title2
EH5
A4, DIN 985, KLASS 70
A4, ISO 7089
A4, CLASS 70, DIN7991
Specification
39047 a
38996 a
76460 77798 1019493 -
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
F/N
Qty
Hydraulic System, 17021 rev. g
17021
Name
Title
HYDRAULIC ASSY EH 5
Title2
17021 g
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
F/N
Part, 34375 rev. f
Qty
34375
Name
Title
PUMP UNIT ASSY.
Title2
34375 f
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
A-A
1:5
1.0 60629
1.0 24167
1.0 24168
1.0 62595
10.0 47678
6.0 72010
12.0 75052
24.0 75292
12.0 76842
3.0 401528
5
3
4
9
10
7
8
6
11
24169
2.0 60628
Qty
F/N
Mounting Assy, 24169 rev. d

Name
Title
FLIPPER ARM ASS.
GEARBOX ASSY FLIPPER T.1
SMAL
GEARBOX ASSY FLIPPER T.2
SMAL
FLIPPER ARM
FLIPPER ARM
FLIPPER ARM
SPACER
KEY 20X12X30
NUT LOC-KING M20
WASHER BRB 21x36x3
SCREW M6S 20x110
BUFFER ASSY.
Title2
TK, SMS 2307

DIN 985, FZB, CLASS 8
FZB, SMS 70
CLASS 8.8, ISO 4014
-
Specification
24167 c
24168 c
24168 c
47678 d 47678 d
72010 a
75052 75292 76842 401528 -
24169 d
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
F/N
Part, 39055 rev. b
Qty
39055
Name
Title
GEARBOX ASSY
Title2
39055 b
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
16.0 1028199
2.0 1000785
2.0 1029307
1.0 78127
4.0 78126
2.0 1015779
1.0 1027882
4
5
6
7
Name
1
2
Qty
1041334
2.0 37759
16.0 700097
F/N
Decoration, 1041334 rev. Title
PAINT DECAL TEMPLATE KIT
WARING SIGN
DECORATION
SIGN SWL
SCREW MC6S 6X10
NYLON WASHER BRB
6,4x12x1,6
SIGN
BROMMA LOGO
WARNING SIGN
WARNING SIGN
Title2
JIB / ROTATOR
PAINT DECAL TEMPLAT
WARNING SIGN TRIANGLE
40x40
EH5U & EH170U
Polyamid, DIN 125, ISO 7089
A4 KLASS 70 ISO 4762
Specification
1000785 c
1029307 78127 a
78126 - 78126 -
1028199 -
1041334 37759 e 37759 e

700097 a
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
F/N
Qty
Mounting Assy, 1001444 rev. Name
1001444
Title
LED-PANEL MOUNT. DET.
Title2
Specification
1001444 - 1001444 -
Page - 1
KSI
10/21/11
F/N
Qty
Telescopic Beam Unit, 24142 rev. -
24142
Name
Title
TELESCOPIC BEAM UNIT
Title2
24142 -
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
1/19/12
F/N
Part, 34375 rev. f
Qty
34375
Name
Title
PUMP UNIT ASSY.
Title2
34375 f
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
1/19/12
F/N
Part, 37409 rev. b
Qty
37409
Name
Title
CABLE CHAIN ASSY.
YSX 40/45E
Title2
37409 b
Specification
Page - 1
KSI
1/19/12
Manufacturer:
B rommaConquipAB
SWL
Serial No.
Type
Weight
Tonne
Manufacturing Year
POW ER SUPPL Y
40 0 VAC
44 0 VAC
46 0 VAC
FREQUENCY
50 Hz
60 Hz
CONT ROL VOL T AGE

24 VDC
11 5 VAC
23 0 VAC
Name
1.0 1027882
2.0 37759
4.0 78126
1.0 78127
16.0 700097
2.0 1000785
16.0 1028199
2.0 1029307
9
1
7
6
2
4
1043058
2.0 1015779
Qty
F/N
Decoration, 1043058 rev. Title
PAINT DECAL TEMPLATE KIT

SIGN SWL
WARNING SIGN
WARNING SIGN
SCREW MC6S 6X10
SIGN
NYLON WASHER BRB
6,4x12x1,6
BROMMA LOGO
WARING SIGN
DECORATION
Title2
PAINT DECAL TEMPLAT
Polyamid, DIN 125, ISO 7089
WARNING SIGN TRIANGLE

40x40
EH5U & EH170U
A4 KLASS 70 ISO 4762
JIB / ROTATOR
Specification
1029307 -
1028199 -
37759 e 37759 e
78126 - 78126 78127 a
700097 a
1000785 c
1043058 -
Page - 1
KSI
2/3/12
9 Hydraulic circuit diagrams
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
09 01 ENG
rev.
10 Electrical wiring diagrams
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
10 01 ENG
rev
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
Manufacturing site
DATE
By
This drawing is copyright, and is

the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB.
The design and/or constructions
contained therein, may not be copied
or reproduced, whitout the written
consent of the owner.
: muhamaz
: BICT Indonesia
: 15487
: EH5U
:
Project name
Serial Number
Type
Responsible for project
: 11/20/2009
: 12/15/2011
: BROMMA CONQUIP
S-164 22 KISTA
SWEDEN
Email: SALES@BROMMA.COM
+46 (0)8 620 09 00
Tel:
MALAXGATAN 7
Manufacturer (Company)
Created on the
The latest revition
BROMMA CONQUIP
: BICT
: A1
: 1043066
:
Customer
Plant designation
Drawing Number
Revision
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
muhamaz
09/19/2001
15487
EH5U
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
40
1043066
Number of pages :
BICT Indonesia
Flyleaf
BROMMA SPREADER EH5U
BICT Indonesia
REV.
1
2
F
40
Location
X0
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X1
X0
X1
X0
Plant des.
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
A1
Page
Table of content
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Rev

Page description
Flyleaf
Table of contents
Table of contents
Connector designation
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
Circuit diagram
PLC diagram
I/O card overview
I/O card overview
I/O card overview
Cabinet layout
Cable/ Sensor Layout
Cabinet layout
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
Revision note
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
EH5U
muhamaz
11/02/2001
15487
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
Table of contents
BICT Indonesia
DRAWING NO.
Date
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
01/24/2005
12/15/2011
11/20/2009
03/02/2009
12/15/2011
03/04/2009
01/19/2005
03/02/2009
12/15/2011
03/02/2009
12/15/2011
01/19/2005
03/04/2011
01/24/2005
03/04/2011
01/24/2005
03/04/2011
01/18/2005
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
Editor
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
bln
muhamaz
sharifsy
krpulha
muhamaz
krpulha
bln
krpulha
muhamaz
krpulha
muhamaz
bln
muhamaz
bln
muhamaz
bln
muhamaz
bln
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
REV.
2
3
40
Plant des.
A1
A1
A1
Location
X0
X0
X0
Page
Table of content
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Rev

Page description
Spreader layout
Parts list: (79125 - 70592)
Parts list: (1028417 - 73983)
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
CABLE LIST
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
Revision note
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
EH5U
muhamaz
11/03/2004
15487
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
Table of contents
BICT Indonesia
DRAWING NO.
Date
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
12/15/2011
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
Editor
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
muhamaz
REV.
3
4
40
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
L1
SIGN.
DATE
PE
L3
POWER SUPPLY
L2
PE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
16
23
10
29
17
30
18
35
25
12
31
19
36
26
13
32
20
37
27
14
MALE INSERT
34
24
11
33
21
22
RED POINT
28
15
XP1 PIN DESCRIPTION
bln
05/08/2002
15487
EH5U
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
:
X0
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
BICT Indonesia
Connector designation
PLUG= ODU 309 012 000 554 000 BROMMA Nr.71480

INSERT = ODU 309 803 150 037 151 BROMMA Nr.74410
SPREADER CONNECTOR

(OPTION)
L1
SPARE
SPARE
PROTECTION EARTH
POWER SUPPLY
PROTECTION EARTH
H.I.S OR TTDC SIGNAL

POWER SUPPLY
L2
SPARE
POWER SUPPLY
L3
N
CONTROL VOLTAGE
L
CONTROL VOLTAGE
CONTROL VOLTAGE PILOT
MOVE TELESCOPE TO 20FT CMD
ALL FLIPPERS UP COMMAND
GREEN FLIPPERS DOWN COMMAND
YELLOW FLIPPER DOWN COMMAND
BLUE FLIPPER DOWN COMMAND
RED FLIPPERS DOWN COMMAND
TWL LOCK COMMAND
TWL UNLOCK COMMAND
LOCKED SIGNAL
UNLOCKED SIGNAL
MOVE G.P. TO BLUE COMMAND
MOVE G.P. TO YELLOW COMMAND
G.P. IN CENTRE SIGNAL
LANDED SIGNAL
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY
XP1 SPREADER MALE CONTACT
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
REV.
4
5
F
40
ITEM
A1
+X0
:L1
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
/7.01
31
:L1
-K1
-Q1
-X2
-WXP1
-XP1
/6.01 / -Phase L1
:L2
32
:L3
:L3
SIGN.
25
34
24
Supply
400VAC 50Hz
:L2
/6.01 / -Phase L2
/6.01 / -Phase L3
DATE
:PE
33
33
:PE
PE
37
-K8
-XP23
/10.04
A1
+X100
3.0KW
-M4
M
3 ~
:8
I>
PE
:9
I>
-K9
PE
:PE
21
21
/10.05
-BRAKE2
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
-M4
Telescopic motor
-WM4
:7
I>
-X2
-WXP23
-QM8

A1
+X0
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
-K2
M
3 ~
:2
I>
PE
:3
I>
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
:
X1
PE
:PE
-K3
/10.02
-BRAKE1
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
-M1
Gravity point motor
5.5KW
-M1
:1
I>
-X2
/10.01
-WM1
-QM1
muhamaz
05/14/2002
15487
EH5U
DRAWING NO.
2A
-F1
-P1
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
1043066
REV.
5
6
F
40
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
A1
+X0
/5.01 / -Phase L1
/5.01 / -Phase L2
/5.01 / -Phase L3
-XP23
SIGN.
M
3 ~
:2
DATE
PE
:3
I>
-M2
Hydralic pump
left
2.2KW
-M2
I>
:1
I>
-X2
-WM2
A1
+X100
-WXP23
-QM6
-K6
/10.03
M
3 ~
:5
I>
PE
PE
:PE
20
20
:PE
PE
PE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
:6
I>
-M3
Hydralic pump
right
2.2KW
:4
I>
-M3
-WM3
-QM7

PE
:PE
22
22
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
sharifsy
05/14/2002
15487
EH5U
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
:
X1
11
12
/7.07
-KA1
:103
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
Cabinet heater
14
:101
-EH1
/7.07
-KA1
-X2
21
22
:104
DRAWING NO.
24
:102
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
REV.
6
7
F
40
ITEM
/14.00 / -Spreader stop
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
.01
-SS1
4/5.01
6/5.01
.04
Spreader
stop
2/5.01
12
11
A1
A2
22
21
:107
-K1
-SS1
.01
-X2
SIGN.
:105
14
13
YL/GL
BK BK
- -
RD RD
+ +
24VDC
:1
-X1
-G1
-X1
:3
:2
7
.01

:106
BU
90-255VAC
---24VDC
BN
DATE
10A
-F2
/5.01
-Q1
:108
PE
-WXP1
-K1
-XP21
:+
/8.08 / -XP21:2
:+
:L
:L
:N
:N
:+
/8.09 / -XP21:5
/8.09 / -XP21:4
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
+ 24VDC
:+
-X2
-X2
/8.09 / -XP21:3
:+
:+
:+
:-
03/22/2002
DRAWING DATE:
:-
krpulha
15487
EH5U
0 VDC
:-
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
:-
NOTE:
Wire for 24VDC
shall bee 2,5mm
with blue colour.
:-
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
10
:-
A1
:
X1
22
12
24
14
21/6.08
11/6.08
A2
A1
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
-KA1
Cabinet heater
:-
-KA1
DRAWING NO.
NOTE:
All 24vdc supply should be ring Connected
/8.07 / -XP21:6
-XP1
/8.07 / -XP21:7
/8.08 / -XP21:8
A1
+X0
/8.08 / -XP21:9
/8.08 / -XP21:10
/8.08 / -XP21:1
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
1043066
-0VDC / /10.00
-24VDC / /9.00
-24VDC SCS / /15.00
-L.VAC / /12.00
-N.VAC / /13.00
REV.
7
8
F
40
ITEM
:1
:8
-+VBB X2 / /17.09
red
-WXP22
-X1
-WX2
-GND X2 / /17.09
blue
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
A1
+X0
A1
+X100
A1
+X0
-Can high X2 / /16.09
white
:15
White
/15.06 / -CAN high X1
:22
-WX3
:2
:9
:16
-Can high X3 / /18.09
white
-GND X3 / /19.09
blue
-+VBB X3 / /19.09
red
DATE
-Can low X3 / /18.09
brown
SIGN.
:23
:10
:17
:24
:4
:11

:3
:18
:25
-WX8
:5
:12
:19
-Can high X8 / /20.09
white
-GND X8 / /21.09
blue
-+VBB X8 / /21.09
red
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
-Can low X8 / /20.09

brown
-Can low X2 / /16.09
brown
Brown
/15.06 / -CAN low X1
:26
:6
:20
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
:13
muhamaz
08/27/2004
15487
EH5U
:27
:7
:21
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
:
X1
-WXP21
:14
:28
10
/7.06 / -XP21:10
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
-0VDC / +X1/9.00
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
/7.06 / -XP21:7
PLOTTED:
/7.06 / -XP21:6
/7.06 / -XP21:8
/7.06 / -XP21:9
/7.04 / -XP21:1
/7.04 / -XP21:2
/7.05 / -XP21:3
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
1043066
/7.05 / -XP21:4
/7.05 / -XP21:5
REV.
8
9
F
40
ITEM
A1
+X0
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
-WHL 1-4
+X1/8.08 / -0VDC
A1
+X100
PIN NO: 44
:13
13
13
-HL1
Unlocked left
Green
-HL1
-X2
-WXP23
-XP23
/7.08 / -24VDC
:31
SIGN.
:14
14
14
:41
DATE
-HL2
Locked left
Red
-HL2
:44
+B1-XPX1
:15
15
15
:43

-HL3
Landed left
White
-HL3
2
I
:16
16
16
:42
-WHL 5-8
PIN NO: 21
:17
17
17
:3
:18
18
18
:2
EH5U
05/14/2002
DRAWING DATE:
krpulha
15487
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
-HL6
Locked right
Red
-HL6
COMMON GROUP 2
-HL5
Unlocked right
Green
-HL5
:21
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
-HL4
Tower in center left
Yellow
-HL4
A
I
COMMON GROUP 1
-B1
I
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
:
X1
:19
19
19
:11
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
-HL8
Tower in centre right
Yellow
-HL8
:16
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
-24VDC / /10.00
1043066
I/O 8 SPARE
:1
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
PLOTTED:
-HL7
Landed right
White
-HL7
REV.
10
F
40
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
/7.08 / -0VDC
SIGN.
-K3
6 /5.08
4 /5.08
2 /5.08
A2
A1
:16
DATE
K3
Gravity point
to right
6 /5.07
K2
Gravity point
to left
4 /5.07
2 /5.07
A2
A1
-K2
/9.09 / -24VDC
:26
:8
PIN NO: 44
+B1-XPX1
6 /6.02
4 /6.02
2 /6.02
A2
A1
:6
11

K6
Hydralic pump
left/right gable
-K6
10
I
PIN NO: 21
:35
-K9
6 /5.05
4 /5.05
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
:5
14
bln
06/29/2004
15487
EH5U
Not
connected
MACHINE TYPE:
COMMON GROUP 4
2 /5.05
A2
A1
:4
13
K9
Extend
telescope
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
6 /5.04
4 /5.04
2 /5.04
A2
A1
:7
12
K8
Retract
telescope
-K8
A
I
COMMON GROUP 3
-B1
I
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
:25
15
A1
X1
7
Not
connected
:15
16
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
PLOTTED:
Not
connected
I
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
-0VDC / /11.00
-24VDC / /11.00
REV.
11
F
40
10
SIGN.
DATE
Not
connected
Not
connected
:40
-P2
:50
:46
21
MACHINE TYPE:
Not
connected
:47
22
PLANT (=)
A1
X1
Not
connected
:49
23
Not
connected
:48
24
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
Container
Counter
EH5U
11/23/2004
krpulha
DRAWING DATE:
15487
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
-0VDC / /14.00
-24VDC / /14.00
11
REV.
12
F
40
Not
connected
:30
20
COMMON GROUP 6
PIN NO: 9
Not
connected
:20
19
PIN NO: 50
/10.09 / -0VDC
/10.09 / -24VDC
:10
:9
+B1-XPX1
18
I
17
A
I
COMMON GROUP 5
-B1
I
ITEM
A1
+X0
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
/7.08 / -L.VAC
17
17
:109
:21
Locked
signal
-XP1
-WXP1
-X2
:11
PIN NO: 11
+B1-XPX3
SIGN.
DATE
18
18
:110
:31
26
Unlocked
signal
25
22
22
:111
:41
27

Spreader landed
signal
COMMON GROUP 7
-B1
21
21
:112
:42
28
G.p. in centre
signal
PIN NO: 43
29
:113
:24
G.p. to left
signal
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
:43
MACHINE TYPE:
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
:114
:35
30
muhamaz
03/12/2001
15487
EH5U
G.p. to right
signal
COMMON GROUP 8
I
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X1
7
:116
:45
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
230 VAC INPUT MODULE

BROMMA part no. 1001747
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
PLOTTED:
:115
:44
REV.
13
F
40
12
ITEM
-B1
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
+B1-XPX3
/7.08 / -N.VAC
A1
+X0
PIN NO: 1
:1
33
:5
:117
SIGN.
34
:4
:118
23
23
Telescope
to 30'
CMD
DATE
COMMON GROUP 9
Telescope
retract / to 20
CMD
-X2
-WXP1
-XP1
35

Telescope
expand / to 40
CMD
:3
:119
36
Flippers
all up
CMD
:2
:120
10
10
:15
37
COMMON GROUP 10
38
EH5U
09/26/2002
krpulha
DRAWING DATE:
15487
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
Flipper
right down
CMD
:16
:122
:121
:6
12
12
11
11
Flipper
waterside down
CMD
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
PIN NO: 15
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
39
A1
X1
7
Flipper
left down
CMD
:25
:123
13
13
40
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
Flipper
landside down
CMD
:26
:124
14
14
DRAWING NO.
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
1043066
-N.VAC / /14.00
REV.
14
F
40
13
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
-B1
+B1-XPX3
/13.08 / -N.VAC
/11.09 / -0VDC
/7.00 / -Spreader stop
/11.09 / -24VDC
A1
+X0
PIN NO: 36
:36
41
:49
:125
15
15
Twl
lock
CMD
-X2
-WXP1
-XP1
SIGN.
DATE
COMMON GROUP 11
42
:48
:126
Twl
unlock
CMD
16
16
43
:47
:127

G.p.
move to left
CMD
19
19
44
:46
:128
PIN NO: 8
:8
45
:7
Not
connected
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
G.p.
move to right
CMD
20
20
PIN NO: 10
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
46
:9
muhamaz
07/07/2004
15487
EH5U
Not
connected
MACHINE TYPE:
:10
PIN NO: 40
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X1
:40
47
:50
:30
48
:20
14
13
G.p.
auto return
-SB1
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
PLOTTED:
Spreader
stop
PIN NO: 20
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
-0VDC / /15.00
GRAV.POINT
AUT. RETURN
OFF
ON
15
F
40
14
REV.
230 VAC INPUT MODULE

BROMMA part no. 1001747
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
/7.08 / -24VDC SCS
/14.09 / -0VDC
SIGN.
-B1
+B1-XPX2
:43
GND
+24V
:44
DATE
Main supply
node B1
:42
:10
:9
ID1
Node
Address
:19
ID3

:45
-KEY1
:29
:39
:49
-X2
:30
:129
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
B-Can L
B-Can
B-Can H
+24V
WH
GND
WH;BN
ID0
:40
:130
brown
:20
:50
white
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
Can-GND
bln
07/07/2004
15487
EH5U
Can-open
MACHINE TYPE:
-WXP22
-XP22
-CAN high X1 / /8.01
Can-open H
BN;GN
ID4
-CAN low X1 / /8.01
Can-open L
GN
ID5
:48
BLACK
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
GND
16
:16
26
A1
X1
7
:36
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
:26
36
PLOTTED:
EEPROM
:6
EEPROM
BLUE
SD
GREEN
SC
RED
VCC
GND
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
REV.
16
F
40
15
-X2
ITEM
/17.00
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
-S1
In 1
-S1
Unlocked
left landside
+X2-XP1
-WS1-S5
Left gable end
Node ID: 2
SIGN.
DATE
In 5
-S5
Locked
left landside
-S5
In 2

-S2
Unlocked
left waterside
+X2-XP3
-WS2-S6
-S2
In 3
-S9
Landed
left landside
+X2-XP5
-WS9
-S9
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
In 6
-S6
Locked
left waterside
-S6
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
In 7
muhamaz
03/12/2001
15487
EH5U
Spare
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
7
In 4
Spare
In 8
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
PLOTTED:
-S10
Landed
left waterside
+X2-XP7
-WS10
-S10
DRAWING NO.
+X2-X0
:1
-R2
-Can high X2 / +X1/8.01
:2
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
17
F
40
16
REV.
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
CAN_high
-Can low X2 / +X1/8.01

CAN_low
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
-Y7
Twistlock
unlock left
-Y7
-WY7-Y8
SIGN.
DATE
-Y8
Twistlock
lock left
B 2
+X2-XP2
Left gable end
-Y1
Flipper 1 up
left landside
-Y1
-WY1-Y2
+X2-XP4
Out 2

-Y8
Out 5
Out 1
I
Node ID: 2
-Y2
Out 6
Out 3
-Y3
Flipper 2 up
left waterside
-Y3
-WY3-Y4
+X2-XP6
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
-Y2
Flipper 1 down
left landside
B 2
/16.00
5
I
CHECKED BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
-Y4
Out 7
bln
06/22/2004
15487
EH5U
-Y4
Flipper 2 down
left waterside
MACHINE TYPE:
SERIAL NO.
B 2
6
O
3
I
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
7
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
+X2-X0
DRAWING NO.
-Y6
Out 8
-Y6
Flipper 5 down
left centre
B 2
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
Out 4
-Y5
Flipper 5 up
left centre
-Y5
-WY5-Y6
+X2-XP8
:5
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
18
F
40
17
REV.
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
:3
GND
+X1/8.01 / -GND X2
+VBB
+X1/8.00 / -+VBB X2
1
I
0
O
-X2
I
-X3
ITEM
/19.00
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
-S3
+X3-XP1
-WS3-S7
In 1
-S3
Unlocked
right waterside
Right gable end
Node ID: 3
SIGN.
In 5
DATE
-S7
Locked
right waterside
-S7
In 2

-S4
Unlocked
right landside
+X3-XP3
-WS4-S8
-S4
In 3
-S11
Landed
right waterside
+X3-XP5
-WS11
-S11
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
In 6
-S8
Locked
right landside
-S8
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
In 7
muhamaz
06/22/2004
15487
EH5U
Spare
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
7
In 4
Spare
In 8
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
PLOTTED:
-S12
Landed
right landside
+X3-XP7
-WS12
-S12
DRAWING NO.
+X3-X0
:1
-R3
-Can high X3 / +X1/8.02
:2
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
19
F
40
18
REV.
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
CAN_high
-Can low X3 / +X1/8.02

CAN_low
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
-Y15
Twistlock
unlock right
-Y15
-WY15-Y16
SIGN.
DATE
-Y16
Twistlock
lock right
B 2
+X3-XP2
Right gable end
-Y9
Flipper 3 up
right waterside
-Y9
-WY9-Y10
+X3-XP4
Out 2

-Y16
Out 5
Out 1
I
Node ID: 3
-Y10
Out 6
Out 3
-Y11
Flipper 4 up
right landside
-Y11
-WY11-Y12
+X3-XP6
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
-Y10
Flipper 3 down
right waterside
B 2
/18.00
5
I
CHECKED BY:
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
-Y12
Out 7
bln
06/22/2004
15487
EH5U
-Y12
Flipper 4 down
right landside
MACHINE TYPE:
SERIAL NO.
B 2
6
O
3
I
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
Out 4
A1
X0
7
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
+X3-X0
DRAWING NO.
-Y14
Out 8
-Y14
Flipper 6 down
right centre
B 2
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
-Y13
Flipper 6 up
right centre
-Y13
-WY13-Y14
+X3-XP8
:5
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
20
F
40
19
REV.
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
:3
GND
+X1/8.02 / -GND X3
+VBB
+X1/8.01 / -+VBB X3
1
I
0
O
-X3
I
-X8
ITEM
/21.00
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
In 1
-S54
G.P tower
left stop
+X8-XP1
Centre landside
-S54
-WS54-S55
Node ID: 8
SIGN.
DATE
In 5
-S55
GP tower
right stop
-S55
In 2

-S52
G.P tower
left centre
+X8-XP3
-WS52-S53
-S52
In 3
-S13
20' telescope
position
+X8-XP5
-WS13-S16
-S13
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
In 6
-S53
G.P tower
right centre
-S53
MACHINE TYPE:
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
In 7
-S14
PLANT (=)
UNIT (+)
A1
X0
7
In 4
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
In 8
-S114
30' telescope
positon
-S114
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
PLOTTED:
-S14
30' telescope
positon
+X8-XP7
-WS14-S114
muhamaz
06/23/2004
15487
EH5U
-S16
40' telescope
positon
-S16
+X8-X0
DRAWING NO.
3
-Can high X8 / +X1/8.05
:1
:2
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
21
F
40
20
REV.
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
CAN_high
-Can low X8 / +X1/8.05

CAN_low
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
Spare
SIGN.
DATE
Spare
+X8-XP2
Centre landside
Spare
+X8-XP4
4
Out 2

Out 5
Out 1
I
Node ID: 8
Spare
/20.00
A
2
Spare
+X8-XP6
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
Out 6
5
I
Out 3
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
Out 7
bln
06/23/2004
15487
EH5U
Spare
6
O
3
I
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
7
Spare
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
Out 4
PLOTTED:
Spare
+X8-XP8
+X8-X0
DRAWING NO.
Out 8
:5
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
22
F
40
21
REV.
CAN-open
Interface / Supply
:3
GND
+X1/8.05 / -GND X8
+VBB
+X1/8.04 / -+VBB X8
1
I
0
O
-X8
I
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
DATE

L1 L2 L3
U1 V1 W1
TS
BS
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
bl
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
bl
ws
rt
rt
ws
ws
SR
muhamaz
05/09/2003
15487
EH5U
MOTOR WITH BRAKE AND CURRENT RELAY
W2 U2 V2
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Circuit diagram
BGE
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
REV.
23
F
40
22
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
TYPE
-HL1 Unlocked left
-HL2 Locked left
-HL3 Landed left
-HL4 Tower in center left
-HL5 Unlocked right
-HL6 Locked right
-HL7 Landed right
Not connected
K2 Gravity point to left
K3 Gravity point to right
K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable
K8 Retract telescope
K9 Extend telescope
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
Container Counter
Not connected
Not connected
Not connected
-XPX1:31
-XPX1:41
-XPX1:43
-XPX1:42
-XPX1:3
-XPX1:2
-XPX1:11
-XPX1:1
-XPX1:26
-XPX1:16
-XPX1:6
-XPX1:7
-XPX1:4
-XPX1:5
-XPX1:25
-XPX1:15
-XPX1:10
-XPX1:20
-XPX1:30
-XPX1:40
-XPX1:46
-XPX1:47
-XPX1:49
-XPX1:48
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42

DESCRIPTION
PIN NR.
I/0 OVERVIEW
I/O
NODE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
-B1
NODE
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
30
29
28
27
26
25
I/O
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital input
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital output
TYPE
muhamaz
01/04/2005
15487
EH5U
-XPX3:20
-XPX3:50
-XPX3:9
-XPX3:7
-XPX3:46
-XPX3:47
-XPX3:48
-XPX3:49
-XPX3:26
-XPX3:25
-XPX3:16
-XPX3:6
-XPX3:2
-XPX3:3
-XPX3:4
-XPX3:5
-XPX3:35
-XPX3:24
-XPX3:42
-XPX3:41
-XPX3:31
-XPX3:21
PIN NR.
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
PLC diagram
BICT Indonesia
PLOTTED:
G.p. auto return
Spreader stop
Not connected
Not connected
G.p. move to right CMD
G.p. move to left CMD
Twl unlock CMD
Twl lock CMD
Flipper landside down CMD
Flipper left down CMD
Flipper right down CMD
Flipper waterside down CMD
Flippers all up CMD
Telescope expand / to 40 CMD
Telescope to 30' CMD
Telescope retract / to 20 CMD
G.p. to rightsignal
G.p. to leftsignal
G.p. in centre signal
Spreader landed signal
Unlocked signal
Locked signal
DESCRIPTION
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
REV.
24
40
23
Not
connected
Not
connected
-B1
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
I/0 OVERVIEW
XP1

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
muhamaz
01/04/2005
15487
EH5U
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
MACHINE TYPE:
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
24VDC / Output red
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
XP3
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
115/230VAC /
Output black
24VDC / Output red
XP2
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
24VDC / Output red
115/230VAC /
Output black
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
115/230VAC /
Output black
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
115/230VAC /
Output black
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red

115/230VAC /
Output black
CMD
CMD
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
CMD
Twl
unlock
Telescope
to 30'
Twl
lock
retract / to 20
CMD
Telescope
CMD
Flipper
landside down
CMD
left down
CMD
Flipper
waterside down
CMD
Flipper
right down
CMD
Flipper
all up
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
I/O card overview
BICT Indonesia
24VDC / Input white
24VDC / Input white
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
115/230VAC / Input
yellow
G.p.
auto return
Spreader
stop
Not
connected
Not
connected
CMD
G.p.
move to right
CMD
G.p.
move to left
Telescope
expand / to 40
CMD
Flippers
115/230VAC /
Output black
Not
connected
Not
connected
G.p. to left
signal
Container
Counter
Not
connected
G.p. in centre
signal
Not
connected
-HL7
Landed right
Spreader landed
signal
Not
connected
G.p. to right
signal
Unlocked
signal
Not
connected
Not
connected
Locked
signal
Not
connected
Not
connected
telescope
Extend
left/right gable
K8
Retract
telescope
K9
K2
Gravity point
to left
K3
Gravity point
to right
K6
Hydralic pump
-HL6
Locked right
-HL5
Unlocked right
-HL4
Tower in center left
-HL3
Landed left
-HL2
Locked left
-HL1
Unlocked left
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
REV.
25
40
24
-S10 Landed left waterside
-S9 Landed left landside
-S2 Unlocked left waterside
-S1 Unlocked left landside
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
I/0 OVERVIEW
-S5 Locked left landside
Connector 1
-S6 Locked left waterside
Connector 3
Spare
Connector 5
Spare
Connector 7
Pin
INPUTS
Module ID: 2
Pin
-Y7 Twistlock unlock left
-Y8 Twistlock lock left
Connector 2
-Y1 Flipper 1 up left landside
-Y2 Flipper 1 down left landside
Connector 4
-Y3 Flipper 2 up left waterside
-Y4 Flipper 2 down left waterside
Connector 6
-Y5 Flipper 5 up left centre
-Y6 Flipper 5 down left centre
Connector 8
OUTPUTS

Left gable end
-X2
INPUTS
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
-S3 Unlocked right waterside
-S7 Locked right waterside
Connector 1
-S4 Unlocked right landside
-S8 Locked right landside
Connector 3
-S11 Landed right waterside
Spare
Connector 5
-S12 Landed right landside
Spare
Connector 7
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
Pin
CAN-Open I/O
EH5U
muhamaz
12/03/2004
15487
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
Pin
FILENAME:
12/15/2011
16:42
I/O card overview

DRAWING NO.
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
1043066
-Y15 Twistlock unlock right
-Y16 Twistlock lock right
Connector 2
-Y9 Flipper 3 up right waterside
-Y10 Flipper 3 down right waterside
Connector 4
-Y11 Flipper 4 up right landside
-Y12 Flipper 4 down right landside
Connector 6
-Y13 Flipper 6 up right centre
-Y14 Flipper 6 down right centre
Connector 8
OUTPUTS
BICT Indonesia
PLOTTED:
Module ID: 3
Right gable end
-X3
REV.
26
40
25
-S14 30' telescope positon
-S13 20' telescope position
-S52 G.P tower left centre
-S54 G.P tower left stop
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
I/0 OVERVIEW
-S55 GP tower right stop
Connector 1
-S53 G.P tower right centre
Connector 3
Connector 5
Connector 7
Pin
INPUTS
Module ID: 8
Pin
Spare
Spare
Connector 2
Spare
Spare
Connector 4
Spare
Spare
Connector 6
Spare
Spare
Connector 8
OUTPUTS

Centre landside
-X8
Connector 1
Connector 3
Connector 5
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
INPUTS
Connector 7
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
Pin
CAN-Open I/O
EH5U
muhamaz
01/04/2005
15487
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
Module ID:
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
I/O card overview

DRAWING NO.
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
1043066
Connector 2
Connector 4
Connector 6
Connector 8
OUTPUTS
BICT Indonesia
Pin
REV.
27
40
26
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
Distance between cable

trunk and edge 45mm
DATE
15mm
30x90x115mm
2A
-P1
/5.09
-F2
10A
/7.02
/5.09
-QM6
/6.02
733mm
-F1
-K6
/10.03
XP2

40mm
Power supply
G1
X1
XP1
290mm
-K8
/10.04
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
-EH1
-QM7
/6.04
30x90x640mm
XP3
-K1
/7.01
-K2
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
-QM1
/5.07
muhamaz
11/02/2001
15487
EH5U
/10.01
MACHINE TYPE:
60x90x520mm
-KA1
/7.07
30x90x490mm
-QM8
/5.04
B1
Internal layout X1 cabinet EH5U
30x90x380mm
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
X2
-P2
A1
X1
/11.05
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Cabinet layout
740mm
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
Rubber boot
REV.
28
F
40
27
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
DATE
5
1
5
-
PG36
M25
M25
PG11
GLANDS

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
XP23
XP22
XP21
WXP1
WM1
Plug
EEPROM
CABLE
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
muhamaz
05/16/2002
15487
EH5U
External cable connection X1 cabinet / EH5U
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
7
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
BICT Indonesia
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
REV.
29
F
40
28
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
ITEM
SS1
SB1
SIGN.
DATE

STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
MACHINE TYPE:
EH5U
PLANT (=)
A1
X1
7
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
muhamaz
09/02/2002
15487
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
BICT Indonesia
Cabinet layout
GORETEX VENT PLUG

700984, 700985
Assembly from the outside
DRAWING NO.
SHEET
29
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
REV.
30
F
40
Q1
GORETEX VENT PLUG

700984, 700985
Assembly from the outside
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
15
SIGN.
DATE

M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
M16
GLAND
PLUG
PLUG
CABLE
10
WX2
WM4
WM3
WM2
M16
M32
M25
15
16
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
WHL1
M16
13
14
WM5
M16
12
muhamaz
11/17/2004
15487
EH5U
WXP21
WXP23
WHL2
WXP22
WX8
WX3
CABLE
M16
14
11
MACHINE TYPE:
13
M16
M16
GLAND
12
10
11
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
WX13 (OPTION)
WX10 (OPTION)
External cable connection X100 cabinet / EH5U
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
7
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
BICT Indonesia
16
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
REV.
31
F
40
30
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
SIGN.
DATE
Sheild CANopen cable
Terminal fuses
Marking 1,2,......7.

Shield plate
Terminal 24V GND

Marking 1,2,......7
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
Terminal Canopen Low

Marking 1,2,......7
Terminal CANopen High

Marking 1,2,......7
Cabinet X100
PLANT (=)
A1
X0
7
Terminals for -M,-HL.

Marking 1,2,3......19.
SHEET
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
EH5U
muhamaz
01/27/2009
15487
UNIT (+)
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
BICT Indonesia
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
31
REV.
32
F
40
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
XP22
SIGN.
DATE
WXP22
Part no. 1001863

WXP21
Part no. 1001864
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
muhamaz
06/12/2002
15487
EH5U
WXP23
Part no. 1001865
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
External cable connection between X1, X100 cabinet / EH5U
CABINET
X1
XP23
XP21
A1
X0
7
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
BICT Indonesia
CABINET
X100
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
REV.
33
F
40
32
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
LEFT
5
WHITE
BLUE
Y1-Y2 FLIPPER1
Y3-Y4 FLIPPER2
Y5-Y6 FLIPPER5
Y7-Y8 TWISTLOCK
1
RED
2
GREEN
SIGN.
DATE
S1 UNLOCK
S5 LOCK
S9 LANDED
M2
X2
S2 UNLOCK
S6 LOCK
S10 LANDED
M4
S13 20' POS.
S14, S114 30' POS.
M1

X8
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
S53
TOWER RIGHT
CENTRE
muhamaz
08/20/2002
15487
UNIT (+)
A1
X0
7
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
RIGHT
4
RED
34
F
40
33
REV.
Y9-Y10 FLIPPER3
Y11-Y12 FLIPPER4
Y13-Y14 FLIPPER6
Y15-Y16 TWISTLOCK
6
YELLOW
BLACK
3
GREEN
BICT Indonesia
Spreader layout
S4 UNLOCK
S8 LOCK
S12 LANDED
X3
M3
S3 UNLOCK
S7 LOCK
S11 LANDED
HL8 = YELLOW
HL7 = WHITE
HL6 = RED
HL5 = GREEN
PLANT (=)
S55
TOWER STOP
RIGHT
B1
EH5U
S16 40' POS.
X1 CABINET
WATERSIDE
XP1
LANDSIDE
S52
TOWER LEFT
CENTRE
X100 CABINET
S54
TOWER STOP
LEFT
HL1 = GREEN
HL2 = RED
HL3 = WHITE
HL4 = YELLOW
-S114
-X2
-X3
-X8
-X8
-XP1
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
=A1+X0/16.03
=A1+X0/18.01
=A1+X0/18.03
=A1+X0/16.02
=A1+X0/16.04
=A1+X0/18.02
=A1+X0/18.04
=A1+X0/16.05
=A1+X0/16.07
=A1+X0/18.05
=A1+X0/18.07
=A1+X0/20.05
=A1+X0/20.07
=A1+X0/20.06
=A1+X0/20.03
=A1+X0/20.04
=A1+X0/20.01
=A1+X0/20.02
=A1+X0/20.08
=A1+X0/16.00
=A1+X0/18.00
=A1+X0/20.00
=A1+X0/20.00
Part list
=A1+X0/16.01
=A1+X1/6.03
=A1+X1/6.03
=A1+X1/6.03
=A1+X0/18.09
=A1+X1/6.03
=A1+X1/6.04
=A1+X1/6.03
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X0/16.09
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X1/5.08
=A1+X1/5.08
70592
1001762
79282
1001762
1001762
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1034213
1002390
1002390
1002607
1002490
1002520
1002018
1002595
1018972
79125
700026
700026
79125
QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
-S55
X0
-S8
X0
-S54
-S7
X0
X0
-S6
X0
-S53
-S5
X0
-S52
-S4
X0
X0
-S3
X0
X0
-S2
X0
-S16
-S1
X0
X0
-R3
X0
-S14
-R2
X0
X0
-HINK_X0
X0
-S13
-HINK_X0
X0
X0
-HINK_X0
X0
-S12
-HINK_X0
X0
X0
-HINK_X0
X0
-S11
-CABINET_X100
X0
X0
-BRAKE2
X0
-S9
-BRAKE2
X0
-S10
-BRAKE1
X0
X0
-BRAKE1
X0
X0
ITEM
UNIT

PLUG ODU 309 LOCK RING
IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN
GLAND PLUG
IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN
IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN
PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F
RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W
RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W
CABLE AND ITEM MARKING
X1 cabinet EH5 ASSY
PROTECTION COVER HTS
PROTECTION COVER HTS
CABLE AND ITEM MARKING
CABINET X100 CANopen
CURRENT RELAY SR15
GLAND ADAPTER
GLAND ADAPTER
CURRENT RELAY SR15
DENOMINATION
ODU
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
GUNNAR PETTERSON AB
IFM-Electronic
MILTRONIC AB
IFM-Electronic
IFM-Electronic
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
Elfa
Elfa
MILTRONIC
BROMMA
ABB
ABB
MILTRONIC
SEW
MILTRONIC AB
MILTRONIC AB
SEW
SUPPLIER
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
IFM-Electronic
MURR
IFM-Electronic
IFM-Electronic
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
IFM
Elfa
Elfa
FLEXIMARK
ABB
ABB
FLEXIMARK
Bromma
SEW
LAPP
LAPP
SEW
MANUFACTURE
SR15
muhamaz
10/03/2001
15487
EH5U
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
309 021 018 200 000
CR9011
ZVKM12
CR9011
CR9011
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
60-103-83
60-103-83
5DLN296350-C
5DLN296350-A
1018972
SR15
12 67 42
12 67 42
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
SIZE1
SIZE4
END BEAM 3-FLIPPER
Mobile Spreader 10 fuse
BSR 150-500VAC M25
SKINDICHT M32/M25
SKINDICHT M32/M25
BSR 150-500VAC M25
DRAWING NO.
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
35
40
34
REV.
309 021 018 200 000
8 in / 8 out
ASB BOX PLUGS M12
8 in / 8 out
8 in / 8 out
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
TOWER JIB
Complete with SCS for CAN open
Parts list: (79125 - 70592)
BICT Indonesia
309 021 018 200 000
CR9011
40 57 05
CR9011
CR9011
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
II5945
60-103-83
60-103-83
1002490
5DLN296350-C
5DLN296350-A
1018972
8267626
12 67 42
12 67 42
8267626
TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
73272
71480
74410
75618
73983
Part list
1028417
QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
ITEM
UNIT

CRIMPING HOSE
SHRINK HOUSE 85/25
INSERT 37P (M) ODU
PLUG ODU 309
GLAND SR PG42 32-35mm
COVER FOR ODU 309 PLUG
DENOMINATION
NELCO
NELCO CONTACT
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
GUNNAR PETTERSON AB
GUNNAR PETTERSON AB
MILTRONIC AB
ODU
SUPPLIER
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
NELCO CONTACT
ODU
ODU
LAPP
ODU
MANUFACTURE
muhamaz
01/28/2009
15487
EH5U
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
MWTM-85/25-1000/172
309 803 150 037 151
309.021.000.554
SKINDICHT-SR 42/35
309.097.002.924.000
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
for Plug 309.021
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
SHEET
36
40
35
REV.
ODU 309 37 POL MALE
EXCL.Lock ring IP56 PG42
DRAWING NO.
Parts list: (1028417 - 73983)
BICT Indonesia
309 803 150 037 151
309.021.000.554
12 02 35
309.097.002.924.000
TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA
-M2
-M2
-M3
-M3
-M3
-M3
-M4
-M4
-M4
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
Cable list
PE
PE
PE
PE
PIN No.
-WS2-S6
-WS1-S5
-WS1-S5
-WS12
-WS11
-WS10
-WS9
-WM4
-WM4
-WM4
-WM4
-WM3
-WM3
-WM3
-WM3
-WM2
-WM2
-WM2
-WM2
-WM1
-WM1
-WM1
-WM1
-WHL 5-8
-WHL 5-8
-WHL 5-8
-WHL 5-8
-WHL 5-8
-WHL 1-4
-WHL 1-4
-WHL 1-4
-WHL 1-4
-WHL 1-4
CABLE
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
-S2
-M2
X0
-S5
-M2
X0
X0
-M1
X0
X0
-M1
X0
-S1
-M1
X0
-XP7
-M1
X0
X0
-HL8
X0
X3
-HL7
X0
-XP5
-HL6
X0
-XP7
-HL5
X0
X3
-HL5
X0
X2
-HL4
X0
-M4
-HL3
X0
-XP5
-HL2
X0
X2
-HL1
X0
X0
-HL1
X0
FROM
PE
PE
PE
PE
CORE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M
CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m
-X2 :1
-X2 :2
-X2 :3
-X2 :PE
-X2 :4
-X2 :5
-X2 :6
-X2 :PE
-X2 :7
-X2 :8
-X2 :9
-X2 :PE
-S9 4
-S10 4
-S11 4
-S12 4
-XP1 4
-XP1 2
-XP3 4
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
CABLE
-X2 :PE
LED LAMPS
-X2 :19
CABLE
LED LAMPS
-X2 :18
CABLE
LED LAMPS
-X2 :17
-X2 :3
LED LAMPS
-X1 :14
-X2 :2
LED LAMPS
-X2 :16
LED LAMPS
LED LAMPS
-X2 :15
CABLE
LED LAMPS
-X2 :14
-X2 :1
LED LAMPS
-X2 :13
-X2 :16
LED LAMPS
-X1 :14
TERMINAL No.

X2
X2
X2
X0
X0
X0
X0
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X1
X1
X1
X1
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
TO
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
TYPE
EH5U
muhamaz
01/24/2002
15487
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
1023804
1023805
1023805
79292
79294
79292
79294
78173
78173
78173
78173
78173
78173
78173
78173
78173
78173
78173
78173
70996
70996
70996
70996
1001883
1001883
1001883
1001883
1001883
1001883
1001883
1001883
1001883
1001883
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
CABLE LIST
BICT Indonesia
M12 Twin cable Prox.
M12 2xANGLE
M12 2xANGLE
M12 2xANGLE
M12 2xANGLE
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x1,5mm PUR
4x2,5mm PUR
4x2,5mm PUR
4x2,5mm PUR
4x2,5mm PUR
24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE
=A1+X0/16.03
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
REV.
37
40
36
=A1+X0/16.02
SHEET
=A1+X0/16.01
=A1+X1/6.04
=A1+X1/6.04
11
=A1+X0/18.07
=A1+X1/6.04
11
=A1+X1/6.02
11
=A1+X0/18.05
=A1+X1/6.02
12
=A1+X1/6.02
12
=A1+X0/16.07
=A1+X1/6.02
12
=A1+X1/5.07
12
=A1+X0/16.05
=A1+X1/5.07
=A1+X1/5.07
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X1/5.07
=A1+X1/9.08
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X1/9.07
=A1+X1/9.06
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X1/9.05
=A1+X1/8.07
=A1+X1/9.04
=A1+X1/6.04
=A1+X1/9.03
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X1/9.02
=A1+X1/9.01
11
=A1+X1/8.07
SHEET
QTY
DRAWING NO.
ART. NR.
-S53
-S54
-S55
-X0
-X0
-X0
-X0
-X0
-X0
-X0
-X0
-X0
-X0
-X0
-X0
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
X0
X0
X2
X2
X2
X2
X3
X3
X3
X3
X8
X8
X8
X8
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
Cable list
32
31
:3
:5
:2
:1
:3
:5
:2
:1
:3
:5
:2
:1
PIN No.
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WX8
-WX8
-WX8
-WX8
-WX3
-WX3
-WX3
-WX3
-WX2
-WX2
-WX2
-WX2
-WS54-S55
-WS54-S55
-WS52-S53
-WS52-S53
-WS14-S114
-WS14-S114
-WS13-S16
-WS13-S16
-WS4-S8
-WS4-S8
-WS3-S7
-WS3-S7
-WS2-S6
CABLE
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
-S52
-S16
X0
X0
-S13
X0
X0
-S8
X0
-S14
-S4
X0
-S114
-S7
X0
X0
-S3
X0
X0
-S6
X0
FROM
blue
red
brown
white
blue
red
brown
white
blue
red
brown
white
CORE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
-X1 :2
-X1 :9
-X1 :19
-X1 :26
-X1 :5
-X1 :12
-X2 :L1
-X2 :L1
-X2 :L2
-X2 :L2
-X2 :106
-X2 :107
-X2 :108
-X2 :117
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
-XP1 2
CABLE
-XP1 4
CABLE
-XP3 2
-X1 :23
-XP3 4
-X1 :16
-XP7 2
CABLE
-XP7 4
CABLE
-XP5 2
-X1 :8
-XP5 4
-X1 :1
-XP3 2
CABLE
-XP3 4
CABLE
-XP1 2
-X1 :22
-XP1 4
-X1 :15
-XP3 2
TERMINAL No.

X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X8
X8
X8
X8
X8
X8
X8
X8
X3
X3
X3
X3
X2
TO
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
TYPE
EH5U
muhamaz
05/16/2002
15487
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
1001860
1001860
1001860
1001860
1001860
1001860
1001860
1001860
1001860
1001860
1001860
1001860
1023807
1023807
1023805
1023805
1023802
1023802
1023807
1023807
1023804
1023804
1023805
1023805
1023804
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
CABLE LIST
BICT Indonesia
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0
M12 Twin cable prox.
=A1+X0/18.02
=A1+X0/18.03
=A1+X0/18.04
=A1+X0/20.05
=A1+X0/20.06
=A1+X0/20.07
=A1+X0/20.08
=A1+X0/20.03
=A1+X0/20.04
=A1+X0/20.01
=A1+X0/20.02
=A1+X1/8.01
=A1+X1/8.01
=A1+X1/8.00
=A1+X1/8.01
=A1+X1/8.02
=A1+X1/8.02
=A1+X1/8.01
=A1+X1/8.02
=A1+X1/8.05
=A1+X1/8.05
=A1+X1/8.04
=A1+X1/8.05
=A1+X1/5.00
=A1+X1/5.01
=A1+X1/5.01
=A1+X1/5.01
=A1+X1/7.02
=A1+X1/7.01
=A1+X1/7.02
=A1+X1/13.01
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12
11
11
11
11
3
3
3
3
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
REV.
38
40
37
=A1+X0/18.01
SHEET
=A1+X0/16.04
SHEET
QTY
DRAWING NO.
ART. NR.
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP1
-XP21
-XP21
-XP21
-XP21
-XP21
-XP21
-XP21
-XP21
-XP21
-XP21
-XP22
-XP22
-XP23
-XP23
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
Cable list
10
37
33
34
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
PIN No.
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP22
-WXP22
-WXP21
-WXP21
-WXP21
-WXP21
-WXP21
-WXP21
-WXP21
-WXP21
-WXP21
-WXP21
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
-WXP1
CABLE
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
-XP1
X0
FROM
Brown
White
10
PE
33
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
CORE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE
CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END
CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END
-X2 :121
-X2 :122
-X2 :123
-X2 :124
-X2 :125
-X2 :126
-X2 :109
-X2 :110
-X2 :127
-X2 :128
-X2 :112
-X2 :111
-X2 :118
-X2 :L3
-X2 :L3
-X2 :PE
-X2 :PE
-X1 :7
-X1 :7
-X1 :7
-X1 :7
-X1 :7
-X1 :14
-X1 :14
-X1 :14
-X1 :14
-X1 :14
-X1 :15
-X1 :22
-X2 :1
-X2 :2
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
CABLE
-X2 :120
TYPE
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
CABLE
-X2 :119
TERMINAL No.

X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
TO
EH5U
muhamaz
09/14/2004
15487
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
1001865
1001865
1001863
1001863
1001864
1001864
1001864
1001864
1001864
1001864
1001864
1001864
1001864
1001864
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
701222
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
CABLE LIST
BICT Indonesia
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn
3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn
12x2,5mm PUR
12x2,5mm PUR
12x2,5mm PUR
12x2,5mm PUR
12x2,5mm PUR
12x2,5mm PUR
12x2,5mm PUR
12x2,5mm PUR
12x2,5mm PUR
12x2,5mm PUR
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
=A1+X1/13.05
=A1+X1/13.06
=A1+X1/13.07
=A1+X1/13.08
=A1+X1/14.01
=A1+X1/14.02
=A1+X1/12.01
=A1+X1/12.02
=A1+X1/14.03
=A1+X1/14.04
=A1+X1/12.04
=A1+X1/12.03
=A1+X1/13.02
=A1+X1/5.01
=A1+X1/5.01
=A1+X1/5.02
=A1+X1/5.02
=A1+X1/8.06
=A1+X1/8.06
=A1+X1/8.06
=A1+X1/8.06
=A1+X1/8.06
=A1+X1/8.07
=A1+X1/8.07
=A1+X1/8.07
=A1+X1/8.07
=A1+X1/8.07
=A1+X1/8.01
=A1+X1/8.01
=A1+X1/6.02
=A1+X1/6.02
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
REV.
39
40
38
=A1+X1/13.04
SHEET
=A1+X1/13.03
SHEET
QTY
DRAWING NO.
ART. NR.
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-XP23
-Y2
-Y1
-Y4
-Y3
-Y6
-Y5
-Y8
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X1
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
-Y11
-Y14
-Y13
-Y16
X0
X0
X0
X0
X0
Cable list
PE
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
PIN No.
-WY15-Y16
-WY13-Y14
-WY13-Y14
-WY11-Y12
-WY11-Y12
-WY9-Y10
-WY9-Y10
-WY7-Y8
-WY7-Y8
-WY5-Y6
-WY5-Y6
-WY3-Y4
-WY3-Y4
-WY1-Y2
-WY1-Y2
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
-WXP23
CABLE
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
-Y9
-Y12
X0
-Y7
-XP23
X1
-Y10
-XP23
X1
X0
-XP23
X1
X0
-XP23
X1
FROM
PE
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
CORE

-X2 :16
-X2 :17
-X2 :18

-XP4 4
-XP6 2
-XP6 4
-XP8 2
-XP8 4
-XP2 2
-XP2 4
-XP4 2
-XP4 4
-XP6 2
-XP6 4
-XP8 2
-XP8 4
-XP2 2
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
-XP4 2
TYPE
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
-X2 :15
-X2 :PE
-X2 :14
-X2 :13
-X2 :9
-X2 :PE
-X2 :8
-X2 :PE
-X2 :7
-X2 :6
-X2 :5
-X2 :PE
-X2 :4
-X2 :19
-X2 :3
TERMINAL No.

X3
X3
X3
X3
X3
X3
X3
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X2
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
X100
TO
EH5U
muhamaz
09/14/2004
15487
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
700970
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
1001865
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
CABLE LIST
BICT Indonesia
M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
25x1,5mm PUR
=A1+X1/6.04
=A1+X1/6.04
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X1/9.01
=A1+X1/9.02
=A1+X1/9.03
=A1+X1/9.04
=A1+X1/9.05
=A1+X1/9.06
=A1+X1/9.07
=A1+X1/6.04
=A1+X1/5.04
=A1+X1/6.02
=A1+X1/6.05
=A1+X0/17.04
=A1+X0/17.03
=A1+X0/17.06
=A1+X0/17.05
=A1+X0/17.08
=A1+X0/17.07
=A1+X0/17.02
=A1+X0/17.01
=A1+X0/19.04
=A1+X0/19.03
=A1+X0/19.06
=A1+X0/19.05
=A1+X0/19.08
=A1+X0/19.07
=A1+X0/19.02
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
REV.
40
40
39
=A1+X1/6.04
SHEET
=A1+X1/6.02
SHEET
QTY
DRAWING NO.
ART. NR.
:10
:9
:39
:50
:20
-XPX2
-XPX2
-XPX2
-XPX2
-XPX2
-E2
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
X0
-WXP22
-WXP22
-WXP22
-KEY1
-KEY1
-KEY1
-WY15-Y16
CABLE
CREATED: 12/15/2011 16:42
Cable list
-Y15
PIN No.
X0
FROM
Sheild
brown
white
GN
BN
WH
CORE
CABLE
CABLE
-XP22 2
-XP22 3
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS
-XPX2 :49
CABLE
-WXP22
-XPX2 :39
-XPX2 :9
-XP2 4
TERMINAL No.

X1
X1
X1
B1
B1
B1
X3
TO
DRAWING DATE:
DRAWN BY:
CHECKED BY:
SERIAL NO.
MACHINE TYPE:
TYPE
EH5U
muhamaz
09/14/2004
15487
UNIT (+)
PLANT (=)
1001860
1001860
1001860
38905
38905
38905
700970
FILENAME:
PLOTTED:
12/15/2011
16:42
CABLE LIST
BICT Indonesia
=A1+X1/15.04
=A1+X1/15.04
=A1+X1/15.06
=A1+X1/15.06
=A1+X1/15.06
1
1
1
1
1043066
TOTAL SH.
CONT.
REV.
40
40
=A1+X1/15.03
SHEET
=A1+X0/19.01
SHEET
QTY
DRAWING NO.
ART. NR.
GETTING STARTED
WITH
SCS
REV 3
Index
Node Hardware ............................................................................................................... 4
DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................................................................................ 4
General............................................................................................................................ 4
The X2 connector............................................................................................................ 5
Node ID....................................................................................................................... 5
Main Supply................................................................................................................ 6
CAN ............................................................................................................................ 6
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors).................................................................. 7
I/O Groups .................................................................................................................. 7
Common junction........................................................................................................ 8
Internal jumper bars .................................................................................................... 8
Connecting a switch.................................................................................................... 9
Connecting a valve...................................................................................................... 9
I/O Modules .............................................................................................................. 10
APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................... 10
ABE (Application Builder Environment) ................................................................................... 10

System view .............................................................................................................. 10
Pin configuration....................................................................................................... 11
Component view ....................................................................................................... 11
Load view.................................................................................................................. 14
ANYBUS ..................................................................................................................................................... 15
General.......................................................................................................................... 15
Connecting the B1 node............................................................................................ 15
Connecting the A1 node............................................................................................ 16
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus) ............................................................. 16
APPLICATION WITH A ANYBUS INTERFACE ................................................................................ 18
ABE............................................................................................................................... 18
ANYBUS GATEWAY................................................................................................................................ 20
General.......................................................................................................................... 20
BCAN - Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 21
Power connector........................................................................................................ 21
BCAN connector....................................................................................................... 21
Node address key switches ....................................................................................... 21
Serial port connector ................................................................................................. 21
APS .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
Absolute encoder on the telescope................................................................................ 22

General...................................................................................................................... 22
The RS485 component.............................................................................................. 22
From bits to millimetres (scale) ................................................................................ 23
REV 3
Teach......................................................................................................................... 23
EXTERNAL EE-PROM ............................................................................................................................ 24
General...................................................................................................................... 24
Hardware................................................................................................................... 24
Software .................................................................................................................... 25
Activate the EE-prom ............................................................................................... 26
REV 3
Node Hardware
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node.
X2- I/O, bus

& supply
Connector
X1- I/O
Connector
X3- I/O
Connector
I/O LED
1-48
Field
bus
RS232
(X5)
Digital I/O
General
Here follows an example of how to build up a Can bus system with two nodes one with
one input and the other with one output.
Switch
Input
Slave (A1)
SCS2
CAN network (BCAN)
B1 Master
Output
Valve
REV 3
Display &
Power
LEDS
The X2 connector
The three connectors X1,X2&X3 have different connection keys to avoid the possibility
of connecting them in the wrong place. It is important to choose the correct one.This is
easy to check, on the connecting side of the connector just below the mounting screw
there is a number 7, 8 or 9.
connection
key
The X2
should be
marked 8
Front view of X2 connector
Node ID
All nodes in a system must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins
9,19,29,39,49 on the X2 connector, where pins being connected to the ground pin (10)
correspond to zeroes and pins left unconnected are correspond to ones. A master
node (B1) has pins 10,9,19,29,49 connected together. (Commonly used as a spreader
Node)
A slave node on the crane A1 has pins 10,19,29,39,49 connected together.
Start with making ID jumpers.
And connect to the X2 connectors, one as B1 and one as A1.
REV 3
Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC powers the node internally. The signals are doubled in the connector
due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied in either direction. The
potential is measured between the A section and the B section.
Name
Pin number in
connector
24INA
X2/42
Potential 1
24INA
X2/43
24INB
X2/45
Potential 2
24INB
X2/44
CAN
The CAN net connection is placed in the X2 connector.
All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and
CAN Low to be able to establish communication.
Name
Pin number in
connector
CAN High
X2/30
CAN Low
X2/40
Here is a schematic with the X2 connectors of two nodes, one A1 and one B1 with node id,
CAN bus and power supply connected.
ID SUPPLY CAN BUS
+
-
24V Supply
Low
CAN Bus High

ID
9 10 19 29
30 40 42 43 44 45 49
10 19 29
B1 X2
30 39 40 42 43 44
45 49
A1 X2
Pin no.
CAN-bus
24V SUPPLY
REV 3
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors)

Just like the X2 connector the X1 and X3 connectors are keyed to avoid connecting them
in the wrong place. The X1 can be identified by the number 7 on the front of the
connector, and the X3 connector by the number 9.
connection
key
I/O Groups
There are 48 digital I/O on a node. Each I/O can be configured as either an input or an
output via the software. The I/O 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups.
I/O 45 to 48 are single I/Os. Each group has a Common junction. This makes it
possible to have different voltages in each group.
Name
Description
X1 pin
number
I/O-9
I/O-10
I/O-11
I/O-12
Common/Supply 3
General purpose input or output

Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12
Description
26
16
6
7
8
Name
I/O-48
Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48
X3 pin
number
30
20
REV 3
Common junction
This point is to be connected to live or neutral depending on if the group is used for
inputs or outputs, Inputs need neutral and outputs need live as showed below. Inputs can
be viewed upon as relay coils and outputs as switching contacts.
G roup used as O utput
G roup used as Input

L/24V D C
N / 0V D C
SC S
9
26
10
16
11
12
26
SC S
10
SC S 11
16
12
I/O M oduls
In the picture is one I/O group used as inputs on the left, and on the right the same group
is used as outputs.
Internal jumper bars

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 and the X3 connector also has groups
of pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The
following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves
with common potential.
Pin number
Link
configuration
Pin number
12
13
14
22
23
32
33
34
17
18
19
27
28
29
37
39
38
(Only in X1) 45
(Only in X1) 36
(Only in X1)
24
Link
configuration
REV 3
Connecting a switch
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the switch into A1.
One of the jumper groups is fed with live and supplies the switch, the other jumper group is
connected to neutral and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply
N/0V Supply
Internal jumper groups
Switch
Cablage
6
8 12 13 1 4
16 17 18 19
22 23 24 26
27
X1 Connector
11 12
10
One Input group
SCS Internal
Connecting a valve
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the valve into B1.
One of the jumper groups is connected to Neutral and supplies the valves secondary side, the
other jumper group is connected to live and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply
N /0V Supply
Internal jumper groups
Valve
Cablage
6
11 12
8 12 13 1 4
16 17 18 19
10
22 23 24 26
One output group
27
X1 Connector
SCS Internal
REV 3
I/O Modules
To be able to adapt the I/Os to the system voltage each I/O channel have a solid-state
interface relay (OPTO 22). This makes it possible to choose input or output and a voltage
range of 12-230 VAC/DC. Each module has a led indicating active state. On the output
modules there is a 3 Amp fuse. These modules are located inside the SCS cover. The
cover has a lens for each channel, so the I/O status can be seen from the outside.
LED
FUSE
Application
ABE (Application Builder Environment)
System view
When ABE is started a new application is automatically started, and the default view is
the system view. The system view enables the user to select a node configuration in the
software, the application compares the hardware with the software configurations and
these have to be equal to work. You may also set system properties in this view. Some
properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.
In the system view we have to activate

the A1 node in the soft ware. The B1 is
the master and is active per default.
Menu tabs
System properties
10
REV 3
Pin configuration
Next menu tab is pin configuration, all present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. (1)
Make sure tab A1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 9 the following name switch.
(2) Comment field is optional. (3)
Activate tab B1 in the view (1) and do the same for Port id# 9 with following name
VALVE. (2)
Note: The red color of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected or that any
of the letters are unaccepted. Space between words is not accepted instead use _.
A red field makes it impossible to compile the application.
Component view
Next menu tab is the component view
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette
displaying all components is available in the view.
The palette can be made visible
by pressing components if it is
not already visible.
Available
component
pallet
11
REV 3
Select the OD timer (On Delay timer) component from the available component pallet
(1). Its located in the Digital tab (2).
1
Place the component on Page 1 in the view with the left mouse button. Then press the
right button to get the arrow back.
Right click the mouse on

the left red dot and work
your way to the input
SWITCH and left click.
Do the same thing on the right red dot and choose the output in this case VALVE
12
REV 3
Put the arrow on the component and right click, and select properties.
Put the delay time to two seconds (in mille seconds). The instance name is an internal
component address and should not be changed. When ready press OK.
Instance name
Delay time
If the application needs to be

saved before it is ready choose
Save. The file will be stored as
a spi file.
When the application is ready

choose Compile. The file will
then be saved as a loadable file
spr and is of curse editable.
13
REV 3
Load view
The last view is the Load view. From this view it is possible to download and up load
applications to and from a connected SCS system. Press the Download button and a
dialogue box will appear, choose the desired spr file and press the Open button.
Download
Choose file
and press
open
Then ABE verifies the action in the progress bar.

First ABE sends the file to the connected node. The progress is displayed in the
connected node bar as percent.
Current transfer
completed (%)
Then the system distributes the file over the CAN-bus to the rest of the nodes (if
necessary).
When the download is ready
this dialogue box appears.
Current transfer
completed (%)
Total transfer
completed (%)
14
REV 3
Anybus
General
Here follows an example of how to build up the same system as before with two nodes,
but the B1 node has one output and one input and on the A1 node is the input replaced
with an Anybus
interface
Outside net
Slave (A1)
with anybus
SCS2
CAN network (BCAN)

B1 Master
Input
Output
Switch
Valve
Connecting the B1 node

Connect the B1 node as in the Digital I/O chapter, and add a switch to Port id# 1 as in the
picture below
G roup used as O utput
G roup used as Input

L /24V D C
N / 0V D C
SC S
1
44
31
41
43
42
26
SC S
10
SC S 11
16
12
I/O M oduls
15
REV 3
Connecting the A1 node

Connect power supply, can bus and an ID jumper as A1 in the X2 connector.
An Anybus card is also to be mounted and connected inside the hood where the digital
I/Os are located.
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus)

This card is used for translation
between different field buses and
a standardized format read by the
SCS system.
There is a D-sub connector on the card for connecting to outside net (1), and a selector
for termination resistance (2) and two selectors used for setting hard ware identification
of the unit in the outside net (3).
1
Item 3.
HW address
*10
*1
4
3
The four LEDs are used for showing the state of the communication from the
Anybus-card and the outside net.
1:not used
2:(green) on-line on the Fieldbus
3:(red) off-line on the Fieldbus
4:(red) indicate faults on the Fieldbus side as follows:
Flashing 1hz-Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization
of the module is not equal to the length set during configuration of the network.
Flashing 2hz-Error in user parameter data: the length/contents of the user parameter
data set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length/contents set
during configuration of the network.
Flashing 4hz-Error in initialisation of the Profibus communication ASIC.
16
REV 3
The Anybus card

is to be mounted
inside the hood on
the right upper
corner of the node
Connect an Anybus jumper

to the D-sub connector on
the Anybus card.
And connect to the outside
connector on the connection
rail beside the card.
On the connection rail the
wires from the D-sub should
be connected in the
following order from the
right 8 3 5 (for Profibus)
Fieldbus connector used for
connecting to the outside
interface.
17
REV 3
Application with a Anybus interface

ABE
Open the application used in the digital chapter. Get in to the pin configuration view
and remove the switch from A1, add a new switch to B1 in Port id# 1
Then get in to the component view and set the cursor on the OD timers input connector
(on the left) and press Disconnect, the connection point turns red if a connection is
acquired for the component to function.
Get an Input bit(1) from the available component

menu under the Anybus tab (2) and place it out in front
of the OD timer and also take an or gate from gates 1
and a split from digital.
Connect the switch to the split, the input bit and the split to the or and the or to
the OD timer. Yore connection should now be as below.
Choose an Output bit and connect it to the split
Note: A red dot on any of the components

makes it impossible to compile the application.
18
REV 3
Right click on in/output bits and choose properties. In the properties menu it is possible to
configure following.
Note is a free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port.
Bit number is the bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface. (0-7)
Byte number is the start byte in the Anybus interface. (0-63)
Node is where the any bus card is located (in this case A1)
Note: The size of the data areas is decided of the highest byte in the application, in both
directions separately. The two sizes have to be equal on both sides of the Anybus card
(outside master/any bus) to be able to establish contact. If the outside areas is bigger than
in the application is it possible to put an empty byte to make the areas match.
19
REV 3
Anybus gateway
General
Compared to a conventional SCS node the Anybus gateway does not have any digital or
analogue I/Os, no internal battery backing up the event log (locally
The anybus gateway is used in cases where a physical I/O is not needed; one example is
when the SCS system is connected as a slave unit (via a anybus card in the crane node)
on the crane PLC.
Status LEDs
Power connector
Anybus card
(in this case
Profibus)
BCAN connector
Node address key
switches
Serial port
connector
20
REV 3
BCAN - Status LEDs

There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status
and one red LED indicating error status.
Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and
flashing when the communication interface is not working as intended.
Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when
configured and operating normally. (Between the node and the anybus card)
Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.
Power connector
The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).
24Volt DC powers the node internally.
NAME
DESCRIPTION
PIN NUMBER
VCC
GND
10 to 28 V DC 1
Ground
2
NAME
DESCRIPTION
PIN NUMBER
CAN H
CAN L
CAN high
CAN low
1
2
BCAN connector
The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81). All nodes in
the system have to be connected equal (bus
topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be
able to establish communication.
Node address key switches

There are five switches selecting node address. The node
identity is defined by using the same bit pattern as the
conventional nodes.
For example to configure a gateway node as an A1 (crane)
node: set DIPswitch 1 to ON and DIP switch 2-5 to OFF.
Or to configure a gateway node as an A2 (crane) node: set
DIPswitch 2 to ON and DIP switch 1,3,4 and 5 to OFF.
A1
A2
Serial port connector

The serial port connector is used when connecting the SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a
computer serial port. (Corresponds to X5 on the conventional SCS nodes)
Use a 9-pol D-sub extension lead to connect.
21
REV 3
APS
Absolute encoder on the telescope
General
The absolute encoder should be connected to the RS485 port. (Channel A at X2/38 and
channel B at X2/37) In the ABE component pallet under the analogue tab, the RS485
port component is located. It is also possible to rescale the information from the sensor to
be able to work or monitor the actual measurements (in for instance mm), the tool for this
is the scale component. The scale component is also located under the analogue
tab.
Teach is used
for storing
positions
Add the RS485 port component

from the analogue tab
The scale component
makes it possible to
translate the sensor
value to the
mechanical distance
The RS485 component

This component is used to access the RS485 interface. The component is made to handle
some different types of protocol in this case slin.
The parameters:
Node: each node has one RS485 input. To direct the
component in the software to the correct hardware input,
choose node corresponding to what node the sensor is
wired to.
Protocol: it is possible to choose
between some different standardised
protocols to suit the sensor used.
When using the SSI protocol some more information is needed. (See sensor/manufacture
for data)
Code type: determines how the sensor value (bit pattern) shall be read when converting
to a decimal value (made internally in the component). Gray or Binary.
Input resolution: how many steps (bits) per revolution.
Max revolutions: how many revolutions that are supported by the sensor.
22
REV 3
From bits to millimetres (scale)

Retract the spreader to the mechanical end stop, measure the distance between the single
twistlocks, note the value down, read the sensor value with the ABE online and make a
note of this. Expand the spreader to the mechanical end stop and repeat the same
procedure.
Note: It is very important that the sensor doesnt wraparound (when counting up, after
the highest value it starts at zero again), the retracted value should be low and the
expanded value should be larger.
Right click on the scale component and choose properties
And fill in the noted values as following.
The measured max
value in millimeters
The measured min
value in millimeters
The up loaded max value
from the ABE online
The up loaded min value
from the ABE online
Then verify the scale, put the spreader in some different positions measure and compare
with the scaled value.
Teach
To be able to store positions the APS component is equipped with a storing function
called TEACH. By giving the teach command and expand or retract command it is
possible to move the spreader in a lesser speed (defied by the parameter PWM value for
teach in APS properties) to the required length, for position 20ft, hold the teach
command and give the go to position 20ft command. The value is now stored in the
spreader memory (NV RAM). Repeat this procedure on all the required positions.
The connection point for teach
The connection points for position
direct commands
The connection points for expand/
retract commands
Note: If the scale is made correctly it is possible to verify the spreader length by
activating the teach command, when the teach function is active the sensor value input on
the APS is displayed on the B1 display. Beware of if a "position direct command" is
given at the same time that position is destroyed.
23
REV 3
External EE-prom
General
In the external EE-prom it is possible to store information as spreader ID, twistlock
counters, running time etc. this makes it possible to replace the node(s) in the system
without loosing this information.
Hardware
The EE-prom is to be connected in to the node as following.
Name
Pin number in
Cable
connector
10V supply
X2/36
Red
Serial data
X2/16
Blue
Serial clock
X2/26
Green
Signal ground
X2/6
Black
The EE-prom is located in a gland. The gland should be mounted solid near by the SCS
node within the cable range.
24
REV 3
Software
A spreader properties component needs to be added in the application, that make the
system try to find the EE-prom at boot.
The spreader properties component (1) is located in the misc tab (2) in the
available component menu.
4
3
The spreader properties contains twistlock counters and a time counter etc. To make
the counters work some info is needed, connect the available signals corresponding to the
connection points on the left of the component (3).
The information is possible to send out as analogue words true the bus to the outside net
(if present), the connection points for these values is located on the right of the
component (4).
25
REV 3
Activate the EE-prom

The EE-prom is activated after the Serial number value is set.
The BMS have to be connected to the node that the EE-prom is connected to.
Left click on the Serial number key in the BMS spreader info tab.
In the current key dialogue box down in the left corner there should now be seen serial
number.
Put the spreader serial number in the value bar and press the set button to store and
activate the EE-prom. It now displays the different values.
The Spreader info tag
The get all button
The information from the EE-prom is possible to upload with the BMS from the
spreader info tag. Connect the BMS to the system and press the get all button.
26
REV 3
User Manual
Version 1.0
Revision
Issued by
Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems

Andy Lewis, Bromma Conquip
GO, AL
2000-05-26
2000-08-09
2000-10-10
2000-10-10
2001-01-22
PB2
PB3
PB4
Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems

2002-06-04
2003-06-10
2004-10-08
PA1
PA2
PA3
A
PB1
Date
Measures
First draft.
Corrections
More corrections
Version 1.0
PID component, Online monitoring (manual and tutorial), *.apd
changed to *.spr, Figure numbering corrected, Allowed character set.
Revision after system release 1.04
Printed: 05-2-23 13.40
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Research & Development
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
2(92)
Table of contents
1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................5
INSTALLING ABE...........................................................................................................5
2.1
HW requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.3
Disclaimer................................................................................................................................................................. 5
USER INTERFACE .........................................................................................................6
3.1
Main window............................................................................................................................................................ 6
3.2
Error control............................................................................................................................................................ 6
3.3
Multiple language support ...................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4
General functions..................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4.1
File..................................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4.2
Edit .................................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.4.3
Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.4
Tools .................................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.4.5
Help ................................................................................................................................................................... 8
4
4.1
SYSTEM VIEW ................................................................................................................9

General ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.2
Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.1
Author................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.2
Last date saved .................................................................................................................................................. 9
4.2.3
Creation date.................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.4
Version number ............................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.5
Revision number.............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.6
Spreader type ................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.7
Drawing number .............................................................................................................................................. 10
4.2.8
Customer.......................................................................................................................................................... 10
4.2.9
Comments........................................................................................................................................................ 10
5
5.1
PIN CONFIGURATION VIEW........................................................................................11

General ................................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2
Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2.1
Address key ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2.2
Exists port........................................................................................................................................................ 11
5.2.3
Anybus I/O ...................................................................................................................................................... 12
5.2.4
CANopen I/O................................................................................................................................................... 12
2(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
6
6.1
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
3(92)
COMPONENT VIEW .....................................................................................................13

General ................................................................................................................................................................... 13
6.2
Page functionality .................................................................................................................................................. 14
6.2.1
Adding pages ................................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3
Component functionality ...................................................................................................................................... 14
6.3.1
Adding a component........................................................................................................................................ 14
6.3.2
Moving a component ....................................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.3
Selecting multiple components........................................................................................................................ 15
6.3.4
Cutting / coping / pasting components ............................................................................................................ 15
6.3.5
Delete a component ......................................................................................................................................... 15
6.3.6
Connecting / disconnecting components ......................................................................................................... 15
6.3.7
Online monitoring............................................................................................................................................ 15
LOAD VIEW...................................................................................................................16
7.1
General ................................................................................................................................................................... 16
7.2
Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 16
COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................17
8.1
Controllers.............................................................................................................................................................. 17
8.1.1
TLC4 Twistlock Controller 4 ....................................................................................................................... 17
8.1.2
TLC8 Twistlock Controller 8 ....................................................................................................................... 20
8.1.3
FAC Flipper Arm Controller ........................................................................................................................ 24
8.1.4
DPS Discrete Positioning System................................................................................................................. 26
8.1.5
Tower Head block ........................................................................................................................................ 29
8.1.6
APS Automatic Positioning System ............................................................................................................. 32
8.1.7
MPS Memory position system...................................................................................................................... 36
8.1.8
Twin Telescope................................................................................................................................................ 40
8.1.9
TwinUpDown .................................................................................................................................................. 42
8.1.10 PID................................................................................................................................................................... 46
8.1.11 AutoTuner........................................................................................................................................................ 50
8.2
AnyBus ................................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.2.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 53
8.2.2
Anybus System ................................................................................................................................................ 54
8.2.3
Output Word .................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.4
Output Byte ..................................................................................................................................................... 55
8.2.5
Output Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 56
8.2.6
Input Word....................................................................................................................................................... 56
8.2.7
Input Byte ........................................................................................................................................................ 57
8.2.8
Input Bit........................................................................................................................................................... 57
8.3
CANopen ................................................................................................................................................................ 58
8.3.1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 58
8.3.2
PDO Read Bit .................................................................................................................................................. 58
8.3.3
PDO Read........................................................................................................................................................ 58
8.3.4
PDO Write Bit ................................................................................................................................................. 59
8.3.5
PDO Write ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
8.3.6
SDO Write ....................................................................................................................................................... 59
8.4
Guards .................................................................................................................................................................... 61
3(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
4(92)
Spreader stop ................................................................................................................................................... 61

TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System .......................................................................................................... 61
Analogue guard ............................................................................................................................................... 62
Digital guard .................................................................................................................................................... 63
8.5
Gates ....................................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.5.1
AND ................................................................................................................................................................ 64
8.5.2
NAND.............................................................................................................................................................. 65
8.5.3
NOR................................................................................................................................................................. 65
8.5.4
OR ................................................................................................................................................................... 66
8.5.5
NOT................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.6
XOR................................................................................................................................................................. 67
8.5.7
SR Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.5.8
RS Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
8.5.9
Logical gate ..................................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6
Digital ..................................................................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.1
OD Timer On Delay Timer........................................................................................................................... 69
8.6.2
UpDn Counter Up Down Counter ................................................................................................................ 70
8.6.3
OSC - Oscillator .............................................................................................................................................. 70
8.6.4
Split ................................................................................................................................................................. 71
8.6.5
Pulse ................................................................................................................................................................ 71
8.7
Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.7.1
Constant........................................................................................................................................................... 72
8.7.2
Dead end.......................................................................................................................................................... 73
8.7.3
Spreader properties .......................................................................................................................................... 73
8.7.4
Memory ........................................................................................................................................................... 75
8.7.5
Digital buffer ................................................................................................................................................... 76
8.7.6
Analogue buffer............................................................................................................................................... 76
8.8
Analogue................................................................................................................................................................. 78
8.8.1
RS485 port....................................................................................................................................................... 78
8.8.2
IN0 > IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 78
8.8.3
IN0 * IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.4
IN0 / IN1.......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.5
IN0 IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.8.6
IN0 + IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 80
8.8.7
Scale ................................................................................................................................................................ 80
8.8.8
AnalogueLatch ................................................................................................................................................ 81
8.8.9
Filter ................................................................................................................................................................ 81
8.8.10 AuxAnalogue................................................................................................................................................... 82
9
10
TUTORIAL.....................................................................................................................83
CANOPEN TUTORIAL ...............................................................................................90
4(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
5(92)
1 Introduction
ABE Application Builder Environment has been developed to create and manage spreader programs specifically for the
Bromma Conquip SCS2 system used on Spreaders. This tool gives the programmer/user the possibility of configuring and
programming the logic of the SCS2 via a graphical interface.
In principal ABE generates a binary file describing the interconnection between the graphical objects the user has tied
together. This file, when downloaded onto the target system, connects the precompiled objects within the target system
together according to the functionality described by the user. Hence all logical objects, components, reside within the
target system and the program file generated by ABE determines their interconnection.
The objects, from no on referred to as components, within ABE contain a varying amount of logic ranging from basic
Boolean instruction sets to Spreader specific blocks of functionality which can be altered in behaviour via parameter
settings. The components containing specified Spreader functions are developed to ensure that years of Spreader
experience is re-used and also contain the interlocking for generating fault and event messages to the onboard NVRAM
(log).
This programming tool is intended for use by staff with adequate knowledge of both the system and the functionality of
the Spreader/Crane in which it shall be used only. Any alterations or new programs causing failure in functionality due to
logical faults in the program are the responsibility of the person/company carrying out this work.
2 Inst alling ABE

2.1
HW requirements
The minimum requirements to run this application on your PC are:

an Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.
at least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
at least 2Mb of free disk space.
2.2
2.3
Installation
Close any other applications running under windows.
Insert the CD into your station.
Run the file Setup.exe.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.

Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.
5(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
6(92)
3 User interface
ABE-application is divided into four main functions.
This chapter describes the four main functions of the program.
Remark:
Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are:
[a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and _ (underscore). No other characters must be used.
3.1
Main window
The main window of the application consists of one large frame. The four tabs at the bottom of this window represent the
four main functions of the program. The toolbar at the top of the window is used for common operations.
The application supports tool tips.
The application is designed to work on a laptop computer with a display size of 800 * 600 pixels or more.
3.2
Error control
Error control of the program file is performed after every operation. The errors found are marked red. The error control
can be turned off/on from the Settings menu.
3.3
Multiple language support
The default language is English. Additional languages can be requested from Bromma Conquip AB.
3.4
General functions
The toolbar functions are File, Edit, Settings, Tools and Help. Each function is described below.
3.4.1
File
Two types of files are available.

Type *.spr is a compiled file ready to download onto the SCS2.
Type *.spi is an intermediate file. Use Save or Save As... if you are not able to generate downloadable program file but
want to continue your work later on. The file extension will then be *.spi.
3.4.1.1 New
Creates a new program file for editing.
3.4.1.2 Open
Opens a program file for editing/viewing.
3.4.1.3 Save As...

Prompts the user to supply a new filename to which the project will be saved. The file extension will be *.spi.
3.4.1.4 Save
Saves the current project. The file extension will be *.spi.
3.4.1.5 Compile
Generates and prompts you to save a downloadable program file used in the SCS2. The file extension will be *.spr.
3.4.1.6 Print
Prints the Component view.
3.4.1.7 Exit
Exits the application.
6(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
3.4.2
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
7(92)
Edit
3.4.2.1 Cut
Selected components will be cut and saved to the clipboard.
3.4.2.2 Copy
Selected components will be copied to the clipboard.
3.4.2.3 Paste
Content of clipboard will be pasted into selected page in the Component view. If connections match existing ports theses
will also be pasted into the page.
3.4.2.4 Find
Finds a text string in component comments, component identifiers or an actual component.
3.4.3
Settings
3.4.3.1 Error Control

Turns the error control on/off.
3.4.3.2 Show hints

Turns the tool tips on/off.
3.4.3.3 Show component connection info

Turns information at component connection points on/off.
3.4.4
Tools
3.4.4.1 Export Pin configuration view

Exports a list of current Pin configuration as an html page for viewing in a web browser.
3.4.4.2 Export Component documentation

Exports a list of available components an their properties as a html page for viewing in a web browser.
3.4.4.3 Export parameters

Exports the selected components parameters to a file.
3.4.4.4 Import parameters

Imports parameters from a file to current project.
3.4.4.5 Show Ladder, Show function blocks

Shows the current project in Ladder format. Note that one cannot add, delete or online monitor components when ladder
look activated.
7(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
3.4.5
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
8(92)
Help
3.4.5.1 About
Short information about ABE such as version, current number of components etc.
8(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
9(92)
4 Sy stem view
4.1
General
The system view provides a way of enabling and disabling (connecting/disconnecting) nodes and setting system
properties such as version number, author, comments and date of modification. The nodes are named A1-A4 for the nodes
intended to be fitted to the crane and B1-B8 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the Spreader. Each node name
corresponds to a unique address key setting.
The system view allows the user to set up the node configuration by checking the desired nodes. A fixed set of
checkboxes are available that represent the used nodes in the system. The enabled nodes then have to be present in that
system. An exception is if the EXISTS function is used. This function can then replace a node on the bus with an input
on the master node.
The B1-node is selected by default, since every system has to contain exactly one Master node, B1. Four crane nodes and
seven spreader nodes are available for selection.
Checkboxes for enabling Twistlock redundancy as well as Spreader stop have to be checked here as well if these
functions are used.
Figure 4:1 System view
4.2
Functionality
The system view enables the user to select a node configuration. By filling in the checkboxes you determine the lay-out
(topology) of the system. You also determine on which nodes (B1 & B2) you are to have the twistlock redundancy and
Spreader stop enabled. Each node configuration gives the respective node a unique ID represented by the address key.
You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved.
The properties are:
4.2.1
Author
This is the author of the spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.2
Last date saved
Displays the date when the current project was last saved. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.
9(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
4.2.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
10(92)
Creation date
Displays the date of the current projects creation. The creation date is only changed upon creating a new project.
Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.
4.2.4
Version number
A user selectable version number. Maximum version number is 99.99.
4.2.5
Revision number
The revision number is incremented each time the specific project is compiled.
4.2.6
Spreader type
A text field representing the type of spreader that the current program is intended for. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.7
Drawing number
A number corresponding to the electrical drawing belonging to the current project. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.8
Customer
This property is to contain the name of the customer who will use the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80
characters.
4.2.9
Comments
This is a text field intended for general comments regarding the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.
10(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
11(92)
5 Pin configuration view

5.1
General
The pin configuration view is presented as a tabular view of the system, where each tab represents a node. An I/O list
corresponding tags will be available for all enabled nodes in the system. The top tabs indicate which node is displayed.
A tag is composed of its Item identifier and its Comment. The used I/O not yet connected is marked red.
The Port id# field contains a port id, the numerical ID of the I/O number of the SCS2. The Connection field is either IN,
OUT or NC (Not connected) and if its a digital, analogue, PWM or Encoder signals. These fields cannot be edited.
Remark:
Figure 5:1 Pin configuration view
5.2
Functionality
This view allows you to change the tag for all port numbers on all nodes in the system. Within this view you give each
individual I/O its nick name, Item Identifier, to make the program more comprehensible, you also assign any comments
to the I/O. The connection type (IN/OUT) will be updated automatically as the Spreader program is altered in the
component view; i.e. the direction of the I/O point is decided when the I/O is connected. Note that ABE will only permit
I/O configuration that is supported by the current SCS2 HW, hence the digital I/O direction can only differ outside of
groups of four apart from the last four I/O points in the list (45-48) which can configured individually.
5.2.1
Address key
The address key field illustrates how the address key should be linked for the viewed node. This pattern corresponds to
the required connection on the X2 connector on the SCS2 HW.
5.2.2
Exists port
The exists port is used in case versatility on the number of used nodes is required. By letting an Input replace a node
within a system one can then have for instance three nodes active in one case and two node plus the selected input active
in another case, and still run the system without having to re-configure it. This can be useful when different models of
Spreaders are to be used within the same system.
11(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
5.2.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
12(92)
Anybus I/O
With this button you can view all Anybus inputs and outputs in current spreader program.
5.2.4
CANopen I/O
With this button the CANopen configuration form appears, from this view you can create the CANopen functionality.
You can add up to 15 CANopen slaves and add inputs and outputs on each slave (Digital and Analogue).
Advanced configuration of a CANopen slave can be done by using SDO:s (Service Data Object).
For more information about CANopen see general available sources.
Figure 5:2:4 CANopen configuration view
12(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
13(92)
6 Component view
6.1
General
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available
in the view. To add a component, select the component from the Palette and place it on your work space with the mouse.
Remark:
Figure 6:1 Component view
Figure 6:2 Palette
Components may be dragged within a page to change the layout. Each page can be resized vertically.
13(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
14(92)
The following table describes some reoccurring terminology in this manual.

Name
Output tag
Symbol
Description
An Output tag is an intermediate variable used for making
the program more readable and efficient.
Note. Changing the name of an Output tag must be followed
by a change of the corresponding Input tag(s)
An Input tag is used to connect to an existing Output tag.
Note. Changing the name(s) on Input tag(s) must be
followed by a change of the corresponding Output tag.
A component contains logic. The components range from
simple Boolean (AND, OR etc) to those with full
functionality specifically for Spreaders (APS etc.). Some of
the components contain parameters. By double clicking (or
right clicking and selecting properties) the component, its
properties/parameters are displayed and can be edited. A
component also carries component connection points (round
circles).
A red coloured connection indicates that it has to be
connected before a compilation can be performed. Once the
connection point is connected it turns white. This means that
it is connected correctly. If a connection point is white
although it is not connected it is optional to connect it or not.
Input tag
Component
Component connection
Output port
A connection to a physical output. The displayed name is the

Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. Multiple
connections are not possible for an Output port.
A connection to a physical input. The displayed name is the
Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view.
A multiple connection to same Input port is indicated with
two vertical lines on the connection. This is made to remind
the user that the Input port has been connected at least once
before.
Information about the generic name of the component
connection is shown above each connection point when
turned on. The function can be turned on/off from the
Settings menu.
Input port
Multiple connections
Component connection
information
6.2
Page functionality
One page contains one set of interconnected components with no feedback in the connections. Reuse of signals may be
accomplished by adding variable tags, and referring to those tags wherever necessary.
The component view provides the following functionality:
6.2.1
Adding pages
By clicking on the last page or by placing a component on the last page will add a new page below it.
6.3
Component functionality
In each page, components may be manipulated. Operations on components are:
6.3.1
Adding a component
This operation adds the component currently selected in the palette to a page. Simply click the desired component and
then click the location you wish to place this component on the current page youre working on.
14(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
6.3.2
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
15(92)
Moving a component
Moving a component is a matter of dragging it around using the mouse.
6.3.3
Selecting multiple components
Multiple selection of components is possible using key modifiers (shift / ctrl).
6.3.4
Cutting / coping / pasting components
The copied and cut components will be placed on the clipboard, allowing components to be pasted on pages in the same
application or in other ABE applications.
6.3.5
Delete a component
By selecting a component and pressing delete it is removed from the page.
6.3.6
Connecting / disconnecting components
Drawing a line from one connection point to another makes connections between components.
One can also connect a component by right clicking a connection point and selecting a connection from the available lists
displayed (I/O, Components instances, Tags).
Clicking with the right mouse button over a connected connection point will give you the option to disconnect.
6.3.7
Online monitoring
Online monitoring is performed under Component view.

The same spreader program must be present in both ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program to the SCS2 or upload the spreader program from the SCS2.
Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
Start online monitoring by pressing the Start online monitoring button.
Automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval, if Auto is checked
The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.
Stop online monitoring by pressing the Stop online monitoring button (same button as Start online monitoring button).
15(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
16(92)
7 Load view
7.1
General
The load view provides functionality to download and upload Spreader programs. The connection to the system is
selected in the connection box; the possible choices are, Com1 and Com2. Current status of the transfer is displayed in the
three progress bars.
Figure 7:1 Load view
7.2
Functionality
When the download button is pressed the user is prompted to point out the file to download to the system. It has to be a
compiled downloadable program file (*.spr-file). The current status of a download process from the PC to the system is
shown in the top progress bar. The distribution transfer between nodes is shown in the two progress bars at the bottom of
the page. The upload button allows the user to retrieve a program file from a connected system and save it to a file.
16(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
17(92)
8 Component s
Terminology:
In this section the follow terms are used:
False = 0 = logical low level
True = 1 = logical high level
Parameter Instance name:
Every component used in a project will be given a unique instance name, which can be seen by clicking the right mouse
button on a component and selecting properties. This unique instance name is seen in the field next to the title Instance
name. The instance name is used to be able to trace every component instance throughout the project. The name can be
altered, but no two instances of a component can have the same name, since this is the ID used by the system to determine
the interconnection between components.
State transition diagrams:
The state transition diagrams describe the behaviour of the components in general. Terminology in the diagrams is not the
same as in the port listings found in corresponding subsections. The text found in the diagrams is more explicit than the
complete listing.
Example: In the state transition diagram for TLC4 the following text tag can be found: not All unlocked
This text tag is equal to NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4).
The latter expression is rather big and makes the diagram difficult to understand.
Descriptions (when relevant) like the one above will be made for those sections that contain State transition diagrams.
8.1
8.1.1
Controllers
TLC4 Twistlock Controller 4
The Twistlock Controller 4 (TLC4) is used to control four Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a standard Twistlock operation with four Twistlocks. The component prevents the
Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection
of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it
also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.
8.1.1.1 State transition diagram

Not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4)
All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4
Unlock after landed = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
Lock after landed = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
States:
DISABLED:
When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
All outputs are set false.
STARTUP:
This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left.
A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states).
LOCK_ALL:
Lock all Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock all Twistlocks.
IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.
17(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Project No
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Version:
2005-02-23 13:40
Page:
PB4
18(92)
For all s tates :

Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if
SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
LOCK_ALL
[ Lock after landed OR
(landed override AND
Lock) ]
[ All locked ]
[ not All unlocked ]
STARTUP

Lock) ]
[ Unlock after landed OR

Unlock) ]
IDLE
[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]
[ All unlocked ]
[ All unlocked ]
DISABLED
[ Unlock after landed

OR (landed override
AND Unlock) ]
UNLOCK_ALL
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC4
8.1.1.2 Input ports

Input
Landed override
Type
Digital
Description
Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Enable
Digital
Enables component. If set to false

component will set all outputs to
false. Default value if not connected
is true (i.e. no effect).
Unlock command
Digital
Unlock command to unlock all

Twistlocks.
Lock command
Digital
Lock command to lock all

Twistlocks.
18(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
19(92)
Unlocked 1,...,Unlocked 4
Digital
Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status

on unlocked sensor 1 to 4.
Locked 1,..., Locked 4
Digital

on locked sensor 1 to 4.
Landed 1,..., Landed 4
Digital

on landed sensor 1 to 4
Output
Unlock
Type
Digital
Description
Unlock signal to all Twistlocks.
Lock
Digital
Lock signal to all Twistlocks.
Locked signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are landed.
Parameter
Delay
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Time after all landed sensors are true
and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time until a warning message will be

prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked 1,...,
Locked 4 shall become true within
this time when a lock output has
gone high.)
Timeout landed
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time from the first landed input has

gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging
Digital
If set to true (checked) the logging of

messages will be turned on otherwise
no logging will occur.
8.1.1.3 Output ports
8.1.1.4 Parameters
8.1.1.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log
can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.
19(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
2005-02-23 13:40
Code
60
Message
TLC_NO_SENSOR
61
TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR
62
TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING
63
TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST
64
TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING
65
TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST
66
TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING
67
TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK
118
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT
ED
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV
ATED
TLC_LOCK_COMMAND
TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND
TLC_LOCKED
TLC_UNLOCKED
TLC_LANDED
TLC_UNLANDED
119
175
176
177
178
244
245
8.1.2
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
20(92)
Description
No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
Locked sensor lost during operation.
Sensor lost without command/output when
Twistlocks are all locked.
Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal
has not been received after output to valve.
Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
When override input is set to true and
previous state is false.
When override input is set to false and
previous state is true.
Twist-lock lock command received
Twist-lock unlock command received
All Twistlocks have been locked
All Twistlocks have been unlocked
The spreader has been landed.
The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)
TLC8 Twistlock Controller 8
The Twistlock Controller 8 (TLC8) is used to control eight Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the
functionality and interlocks for a Twistlock operation with eight Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from
changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and
always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends
event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

Twin is down (two containers):
not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8)
All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8
Twin is up (single container):
not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,...,AND Unlocked 4)
All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 4
Unlock after landed = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
Lock after landed = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any)
States:
DISABLED:
20(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
21(92)

STARTUP:
LOCK_ALL:
Lock single and twin Twistlocks.
LOCK_SINGLE:
Lock single Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_ALL:
Unlock single and twin Twistlocks.
UNLOCK_SINGLE:
Unlock single Twistlocks.
IDLE:
When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not
changed from previous state.
For all states:

T ransition is m ade to DISABLED state if
LOCK_ALL
LOCK_SINGLE
[ T wi n i s down ]
[ T wi n i s up ]
[ All locked ]
[ All locked ]
[ Unlock after landed OR

Unlock) ]
ST ART UP

Lock) ]

Lock) ]
IDLE
[ Unlock after landed

OR (landed override
AND Unl ock) ]
enable = 1
[ All unlocked ]
[ All unlocked ]
DISABLED
[ T wi n is down ]
T win is up
UNLOCK_SINGLE
UNLOCK_ALL
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC8
21(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
22(92)
8.1.2.2 Input ports

Input
Landed override
Type
Digital
Description
Overrides landed signals. Makes it
possible to unlock/lock if not all
sensors are active. This port must be
connected if enabled in hardware
configuration.
Enable
Digital

Unlock command
Digital
Unlock command to unlock all

Twistlocks.
Lock command
Digital
Lock command to lock all

Twistlocks.
Twin unlocked 1
Twin unlocked 4
Digital

on unlocked sensor
Single unlocked 1
Digital

on unlocked sensor
Twin locked 1
Twin locked 4
Digital

on locked sensor
Single locked 1
Digital

on locked sensor
Twin landed 1
Twin landed 4
Digital

on landed sensor
Single landed 1
Single landed 4
Digital

on landed sensor
Twin is up
Digital
Input signal telling that Twinboxes

are up. Single Twistlocks are enabled
only.
TTDS Fault
Digital
Input signal telling that there is a

TTDS fault. Disables lock
operations.
Type
Description
Single unlocked 4
Single locked 4

Output
22(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
23(92)
Unlock single
Digital
Unlock signal to single Twistlocks.
Unlock twin
Digital
Unlock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Lock single
Digital
Lock signal to single Twistlocks.
Lock twin
Digital
Lock signal to twin Twistlocks.
Locked signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are locked.
Unlocked signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are unlocked.
Landed signal
Digital
All Twistlocks are landed.
Parameter
Delay
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Time after all landed sensors are true
and lock or unlock command will be
able to execute.
Timeout Twistlocks
Milliseconds
[ms]

prompted if not all sensors are made
follow an output from the
component. (e.g. Locked single 1,...,
Locked single 4 shall become true
within this time when a lock output
has gone high.)
Timeout landed
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time from the first landed input has

gone active until the system should
expect all the landed inputs active
and vice versa, the time from which
the first landed signal goes low until
all landed signals should have gone
low
Enable logging
Digital

8.1.2.4 Parameters

Code
60
Message
TLC_NO_SENSOR
61
TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR
62
TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING
63
TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST
23(92)
Description
No twist-lock sensor inputs active during
system start.
One twist-lock indicating both locked and
unlocked.
Timeout while locking. Locked signal has
not been received after output to valve.
Locked sensor lost during operation.
Twistlocks are all locked.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
2005-02-23 13:40
64
TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING
65
TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST
66
TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING
67
TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK
118
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT
ED
TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV
ATED
TLC_LOCK_COMMAND
TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND
TLC_LOCKED
TLC_UNLOCKED
TLC_LANDED
TLC_UNLANDED
119
175
176
177
178
244
245
8.1.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
24(92)
Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal

has not been received after output to valve.
Unlocked sensor lost during operation.
Twistlocks are all unlocked.
All landed sensors not received after first
landed and timeout.
Landed sensor not released when the other
sensors not active and a timer has timed
out
When override input is set to true and
previous state is false.
When override input is set to false and
previous state is true.
Twist-lock lock command received
Twist-lock unlock command received
All Twistlocks have been locked
All Twistlocks have been unlocked
The spreader has been landed.
The Spreader has been totally lifted (not
landed)
FAC Flipper Arm Controller
The FAC component is used for grouping and controlling a number of Flippers determined by a parameter of the
component. The function sets either the up or down output at all times depending on the parameter settings. The inputs to
the component generate event messages to the onboard log if enabled.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
This state is reached emedeately after UP or DOWN states have been reached.
UP:
All Flippers are sent up.
DOWN:
All Flippers are sent down.
24(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
For all s tates :

Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
25(92)
UP
[ UpCom m and ]
START_UP
IDLE
[ DownCom m and ]
DISABLED
DOWN
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: FAC
8.1.3.2 Input ports

Input
Up command
Type
Digital
Description
Command to send all Flippers up.
Down command
Digital
Command to send all Flippers down.
Enable
Digital

Output
Flipper up 1,..., Flipper up n
Type
Digital
Description
Up signal to Flipper 1 to n. The
number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.
Flipper down 1,..., Flipper down n
Digital
Down signal to Flipper 1 to n. The

number of Flippers (n) is derived
from the parameter Number of
Flippers.
Unit
Number
Description
The number of Flippers to be
controlled.
8.1.3.4 Parameters
Parameter
Number of Flippers
25(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
26(92)
Operation mode
Option
Impulse (only impulse required for

the command to execute) or Constant
(constant command required).
Enable logging
Option


Code
246
247
8.1.4
Message
FAC_UP_COMMAND
FAC_DOWN_COMMAND
Description
Flipper up command received
Flipper down command received
DPS Discrete Positioning System
The DPS is used for controlling the chain telescope of a Spreader with proximity switch or screw limit switch box
indicating the stops. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as
well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions
are chosen via a component parameter. Parts of its behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant
commands etc are selected by parameters. The intermediate positions are designed to have two sensors per stop but will
perform correctly with one sensor per intermediate position provided it is connected (in the software) to both the inputs of
that position on the component. The outputs of the component are interlocked to unlocked and landed. The feedback from
the component is a signal indicating what position has bee reached as well as a signal indicating that any valid stop has
been reached. The component generates a number of events and warnings if positions arent reached within a parameter
adjusted time etc.
The DPS component is equipped with an fast I/O concept, this means that the component sampels the input sensors at a
higher frequency and sets the actuators according to the internal logic. This will improve the overall performance of the
component. To utilise this feature please note that the position sensors and actuators must be physically connected to the
same node and that no logic is to be placed on the components outputs (Expand, Retract).
If sensors and actuators not connected to the same node the fast I/O concept will be disabled.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state.
IDLE:
Waiting for command input.
EXPAND:
Expanding to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.
RETRACT:
26(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
27(92)
Retracting to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X
command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached.
CONSTANT REPEAT:
When stopped at a position a new constant command is required to go to another position. Depressed keys or similar must
be released before a new command will be excepted.
Example:
1. Expand command is given.
2. Next stop is reached.
3. The telescope stops.
4. Expand command is released.
5. New expand command is given.
6. The telescope continues.
DELAY:
A delay is made for a time defined by Stop delay time (parameter). This delay is only performed if Delay is set in
Operation mode (parameter) else ignored.
currentCommand = is always EXPAND or RETRACT. The command inputs Retract / Expand command or Return to
position X. These command inputs are internally converted to EXPAND or RETRACT depending on current position
and desired position.
For all s tates :
[ desiredStop = currentStop,
Operation m ode = Delay ]
[ desiredStop = current
Stop, Operation m ode =
Cons tant repeat ]
EXPAND
[ currentCom m and = EXPAND ]
DELAY
[ Delay perform ed ]
IDLE
[ com m andInput =
NO_CMD ]
CONSTANT REPEAT
[ currentCom m and = RETRACT ]

Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]
RETRACT
Operation m ode = Delay ]
START_UP
DISABLED
[ SpreaderStop = 0,
Enable = 1 ]
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: DPS
8.1.4.2 Input ports
27(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
28(92)
Input
Expand command
Type
Digital
Description
Input command to expand telescope
to next stop.
Retract command
Digital
Input command to retract telescope

to next stop.
Return to position 0
Return to position n
Digital
Input command to expand telescope

to predefined stop. The number of
predefined stops is set by the
parameter Number of stops.
Sensor 0
...
Sensor n
Digital
Sensor input.
Example with 4 stops:
Stop number 1 has Stop sensor 1,
Stop number 2 has Stop sensor 2 + 3,
Stop number 3 has Stop sensor 4 + 5,
Stop number 4 has Stop sensor 6.
Etc..
Any landed
Digital
Sensor input from landed sensors.

Prevents telescoping when landed.
All unlocked
Digital
Sensor input from unlocked sensors.

Permits telescoping when unlocked.
Enable
Digital

Slave
Digital
Enables slave mode. Telescope will

run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled
Output
Expand
Type
Digital
Description
Output to expand telescope.
Retract
Digital
Output to retract telescope.
In position 0,..., Reached stop n
Digital
Output signal indicating that the

specific valid stop has been reached.
In position
Digital
Output signal indicating that a valid

stop has been reached.
Unit
Description
8.1.4.4 Parameters
Parameter
28(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
29(92)
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time permitted from when an output

is turned on until a valid position
should be reached. If this time is
exceeded the motion will be stopped
and a warning generated.
Operation mode
Option
Impulse, Delay and Constant repeat.
Delay at each stop
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time the telescope is delayed

(stopped) at each stop.
Number of stops
Number
The number of stops in use.
Enable logging
Option
If set to true (checked) the storing of

no generated messages will be stored.

8.1.5
Code
68
Message
DPS_TIMEOUT
69
DPS_SENSOR_MISSING
70
DPS_SENSOR_LOST
71
DPS_MULTIPEL_SENSOR
179
180
181
DPS_EXPAND_COMMAND
DPS_RETRACT_COMMAND
DPS_GOPOS_COMMAND
182
DPS_STOP_REACHED
Description
No valid stop reached within timeout
time.
The expected sensor has not been
reached within specified sequence.
Position sensor has been lost without
any command given
More than one position sensor active
simultaneously.
Expand command received
Retract command received
A command to go to a certain
position received
A valid position has been reached
Tower Head block
The Tower component is used to adjust the point of gravity.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
FEED_LEFT:
29(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Project No
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Version:
2005-02-23 13:40
PB4
Page:
30(92)
Feeds the Tower to the left.

FEED_RIGHT:
Feeds the Tower to the right.
CENTER:
Centres the tower. The Tower is centred when both At left sensor and At right sensor is true.
DELAY:
A delay is performed for a time defined by Direction change time (parameter).
For all s tates :

FEED_LEFT
FEED_RIGHT
[ Feed right ]
[ Feed left ]
START_UP
IDLE
[ Center ]
DISABLED
CENTER
DELAY
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Tower
8.1.5.2 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Enable right
Digital
Enables feeding in right direction.

Default value if not connected is true
(i.e. no effect).
Enable left
Digital
Enables feeding in left direction.

(i.e. no effect).
Right end sensor
Digital
Position sensor input.
At right sensor
Digital
30(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
31(92)
At left sensor
Digital
Left end sensor
Digital
Right command
Digital
Input command to feed head block

right.
Left command
Digital
Input command to feed head block

left.
Centre command
Digital
Input command to feed head to the

centre position.
Output
In centre
Type
Digital
Description
Output signal telling Head block is in
centre position.
At right side
Digital
Output signal telling Head block is to

the right.
At left side
Digital
Output signal telling Head block is to

the left.
Feed right
Digital
Output signal to feed Head block

right.
Feed left
Digital
Output signal to feed Head block left.
Parameter
Operation mode
Unit
Option
Description
Constant or Impulse. Impulse is only
valid for the Centre command
Delay
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time before a change of direction

will take effect.
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time permitted from when an output

is turned on until a valid position
exceeded the motion will be stopped.
Use end stops
Option
If set true (checked) Right end sensor

and Left end sensor does not need to
be connected.
Enable logging
Option

8.1.5.4 Parameters

31(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Code
325
326
327
328
329
330
369
8.1.6
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Message
TOWER_CENTER_COMMAND
TOWER_LEFT_COMMAND
TOWER_RIGHT_COMMAND
TOWER_REACHED_CENTER_POS
TOWER_REACHED_LEFT_POS
TOWER_REACHED_RIGHT_POS
TOWER_TIMEOUT
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
32(92)
Description
Centre command is given.
Feed left command is given.
Feed right command is given.
Tower has reached centre position.
Tower has reached left position.
Tower has reached right position.
Tower has not reached the desired
position within the time limit.
APS Automatic Positioning System
The APS component is used for positioning the chain telescope using an absolute encoder input to read the position of the
chain. Due to the feedback from the sensor, self-correcting is possible if the Spreader is knocked out of position. It is
possible to use both proportional controls (PWM) as well as on/off control with this component. The component can be
used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract
commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions is chosen via a component parameter
as well as are certain parts of its behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc. The
absolute value (count) for each position is done via teach in functionality.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
Expand command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.
EXPAND:
Expands telescope.
PWM expand output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM expand output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM expand output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital expand output is set to false if in Stop window else true.
RETRACT:
Retracts telescope.
PWM retract output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window.
PWM retract output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window.
PWM retract output is set to zero if in Stop window.
Digital retract output is set to false if in Stop window else true.
DELAY:
Performs a delay (Stop delay time) at each stop if Delay is selected in Operation mode (parameter)
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.
32(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
33(92)
CONSTANT_REPEAT:
A new Expand or Retract command must be given to leave this state if Constant repeat is selected in Operation mode
(parameter).
Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.
For all s tates :

[ Operation m ode = Delay ]
EXPAND
DELAY
[ desiredPos ition >

currentPos ition ]
[ Operation m ode =
Im puls e, des iredPosition
= currentPos ition ]
[ Operation m ode = Delay,

des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
STARTUP
IDLE
[ no button is pres s ed ]
[ Operation m ode = Im puls e,
des iredPos ition = current
Pos ition ]
[ Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat,

des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
[ desiredPos ition <

currentPos ition ]
DISABLED
[ Operation m ode =
Cons tant repeat ]
RETRACT
CONSTANT REPEAT
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: APS
8.1.6.2 Teaching telescope positions

This component has to be taught the absolute value (encoder count) of each position. This is done by having the Teach
input go high and at the same time giving the command of the current position to be taught. The current value of the
encoder is then saved onboard the Spreader. All positions, that have been enabled via the parameter Number of stops,
have to be taught a value.
8.1.6.3 Input ports

Input
Type
33(92)
Description
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
34(92)
Enable
Digital

Teach
Digital
Command to teach in new positions.

When this signal is true any Go
position command will store a new
position for corresponding stop.
Slave mode
Digital
Enables slave mode. Telescope will

run at full speed, only Retract and
Expand commands are enabled and
no stops are enabled.
Hooks are up
Digital
Input signal indicating that all hooks

are in up position. Only used for twin
telescopic Spreaders. I.e. if nothing is
connected here telescoping is
permitted, can also be used as a
general permit.
Any landed
Digital
Input result from landed sensors.
Go position 0
Go position n
Digital
Command to feed to defined

positions 0,...,n.
Retract command
Digital
Command to retract telescope.
Expand command
Digital
Command to expand telescope.
Current position
Analogue
Scaled input signal of the current

position.
Output
Stop position0
Stop position n
Type
Analogue
Description
Output signal indicating the stored
positions for the corresponding stop.
In position
Digital
Output signal indicating that a valid

stop has been reached.
In position 0
In position n
Digital
Output signal indicating that the

specific valid stop has been reached.
PWM retract
PWM
PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
PWM expand
PWM
PWM output to control the telescope.
Range 0-1000
Digital retract
Digital
34(92)
Digital output to control the

telescope.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
35(92)
Digital expand
Digital
Digital output to control the

telescope.
Digital high speed
Digital
Digital output for high speed

telescoping in two-speed system.
Parameter
Delay at each stop
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Delay time at each stop if Expand or
Retract command is given and Delay
is enabled under Operation mode.
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time until from when an output is

turned on until a valid position
Number of stops
Number
The number of stops enabled.
Auto correction
Option
If enabled the APS will feed back the

telescope to its original position if it
of some reason has got out of
position.
Operation mode
Option
Impulse: sequence completes until a

new command is given
8.1.6.5 Parameters
Delay: delay at each stop

Constant repeat: when a stop is
reached a new expand or retract
command must be given.
Stop window
Millimetre
[mm]
Distance from defined stop to be

considered as a stop.
Signal window
Millimetre
[mm]
Window around the desired position

in which a signal indicating that the
correct position has been reached is
given.
Impact range
Millimetre
[mm]
Hysterisis for impact detection.
Impact off delay timer
Milliseconds
Delay after impact detected to run.
[ms]
Length of travel
Millimetre
[mm]
Time of telescope
Milliseconds
[ms]
Ramp Gain
Number
Distance between minimum and

maximum positions.
Time between minimum and
maximum positions.
Ramp gain.
[value *1000]
35(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
36(92)
Ramp offset
Millimetre
[mm]
Ramp offset for stop speed
Time to reach max speed
Milliseconds
The time it shall take to reach max

speed.
[ms]
Proportional Gain
Number
Proportional part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
Integral Gain
Number
Integral part of the PI regulator
[value *1000]
PWM value for teach
Number
PWM output when teach enabled.
Reverse Min PWM output
Number
Minimum value on PWM that causes

a reversed movement.
Reverse Max PWM output
Number
Maximum value on PWM that causes

a reversed movement
Forward Min PWM output
Number
Minimum value on PWM that causes

a forward movement.
Forward Max PWM output
Number
Maximum value on PWM that causes

a forward movement.
Enable logging
Option


The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the
fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check
box Enable logging.
Code
183
Message
APS_TIMEOUT
184
185
186
187
272
396
397
398
APS_EXPAND_COMMAND
APS_RETRACT_COMMAND
APS_GOPOS_COMMAND
APS_STOP_REACHED
APS_TEACH_COMMAND
APS_IMPACT_ON
APS_AUTOCORR_ON
APS_IN_VALUE_OUT_OF_T
EACH_RANGE
APS_IMPACT_OUT_OF_SIG_
WIN
399
8.1.7
Description
The telescope hasn't reached its' position within time
limit.
Command to go to a specific position received
The desired position reached
Teach in command received
Impact is detected
Spreader is auto correcting
The position value is not within the teached range.
Spreader is bumped out of signal window.
MPS Memory position system
The MPS component stores either a predefined value or a value set during run time and can then position the twin
telescope to this/these positions on given commands. The MPS uses an absolute input value and can either be used to
return the twin telescope to a number of predefined positions (taught in and stored in the NVRAM). The driver also has
36(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
37(92)
the possibility of storing the current position in a volatile memory of the SCS2 and then returning to this position via a
command until the power is cycled or a new position is stored.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
Expand command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state.
Retract command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position
(depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state.
EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.
RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.
For all s tates :

RETRACT
[ desiredPos ition < currentPos ition ]
[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
STARTUP
IDLE
[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]

[ desiredPos ition > currentPos ition ]
DISABLED
EXPAND
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: MPS
37(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
38(92)
8.1.7.2 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Current position
Analogue
Scaled input signal reading the

current position.
Return to predefined position 0

...
Return to predefined position n
Digital
Command to feed Twin boxes to

predefined position 0,...,n
Returned to stored position 0

...
Returned to stored position n
Digital
Command to feed Twin boxes to

logged position 0,...,n
Store new position 0

...
Store new position n
Digital
Command to log new positions.

When this signal is true the current
position will be stored in the RAM of
the SCS2.
Teach
Digital
Command to teach in new positions.

When this signal is true any Go to
pre-defined position command will
store a new position for
corresponding stop.
Output
Current reference position
Type
Analogue
Description
Signal indicating the currently
desired position.
Predefined position 0
Predefined position n
Analogue
Signal indicating the positions for the

corresponding predefined stop.
Predefined position 0
Predefined position n
Analogue
Signal indicating the positions for the

corresponding predefined stop.
Logged position 0
Logged position n
Analogue
Output signal indicating the positions

for the corresponding logged stop.
In position
Digital
Output signal indicating that any

position has been reached & logged
or predefined).
Expand
Digital
Output signal to expand Twin boxes.
Retract
Digital
Output signal to retract Twin boxes.
38(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
39(92)
8.1.7.4 Parameters
Parameter
Stop window
Unit
Millimetre
[mm]
Description
Offset from stop to be considered as
a stop.
Operation mode
Option
Impulse: sequence completes until a

new command is given
Constant: when a stop is reached a
new expand or retract command must
be given.
Predefined positions
Number
The number of stops that will be

stored in none volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be available after
shutting down system.)
Storable positions
Number
The number of stops that will be

stored in volatile memory. (I.e.
positions will be lost when shutting
down system.)
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time from when an output is turned

on until a valid position should be
reached. If this time is exceeded the
motion will be stopped and a warning
generated.
Enable logging
Option


box Enable logging.
Code
281
282
Message
MPS_TEACH_PREDEF_POS
MPS_GO_PREDEF_POS
280
MPS_TEACH_LOGGED_POS
284
MPS_GO_LOGGED_POS
285
MPS_TIMEOUT
39(92)
Description
Teach command received.
Command to go to a pre-defined position has
been received.
A command to store a new value for a log
position has been received.
A command to return to a log position has been
received.
The twin-legs haven't reached their requested
position within time limit.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.1.8
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
40(92)
Twin Telescope
The Twin Telescope component transfers the commands to expand and retract the twin telescope to the necessary outputs.
The component, although it doesnt hold much functionality, is useful for the event log.

States:
DISABLED:
STARTUP:
IDLE:
Expand command makes a transition to EXPAND state if In 45ft sensor is false.
Retract command makes a transition to RETRACT state if one not In zero left sensor is true and if not In zero right
sensor is false.
EXPAND:
Expands the Twin boxes as long as Expand command is given and In 45ft is false.
RETRACT:
Retracts the Twin boxes as long as Retract command is given and both In zero left and In zero right sensors are false.
For all s tates :

EXPAND
[ Expand, !in45Pos ]
[ !Expand OR in45Pos ]
STARTUP
IDLE
[ !Retract OR (inZeroPos Left, in

ZeroPos Right) ]
[ !SpreaderStop, Enable ]
[ Retract, !inZeroPos Left,
!inZeroPos Right ]
DISABLED
RETRACT
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Twin Telescope
40(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
41(92)
8.1.8.2 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
In 45ft
Digital
Sensor input signal.
In zero right
Digital
In zero left
Digital
Retract command
Digital
Command input to retract the twin

boxes.
Expand command
Digital
Command input to expand the twin

boxes.
Output
Retract
Type
Digital
Description
Output signal to retract twin boxes.
Expand
Digital
Output signal to expand twin boxes.
Parameter
Timeout
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Time until from when an output is
turned on until a valid position
Enable logging
Option

8.1.8.4 Parameters

box Enable logging.
Code
273
274
275
276
Message
TWINTELE_EXPAND_COMMAND
TWINTELE_RETRACT_COMMAND
TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_LEFT
TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_RIGHT
41(92)
Description
Left console reached zero gap position
Right console reached zero gap position
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.1.9
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
42(92)
277
TWINTELE_EXPANDING
Twinlegs expand in motion
278
279
TWINTELE_RETRACTING
TWINTELE_TIMEOUT
Twinlegs retract in motion

Hasn't reached an end stop when in motion
within time limit
TwinUpDown
The TwinUpDown component is designed to be used on the twin telescopic Spreaders. The component performs the twin
up and twin down sequences automatically upon the commands twin up and twin down. The sequence for twin down
consists of the twin units separating until the Left attach & right attach permits have been made. Thereafter the hooks
situated on the tension rod are lowered and finally the twin boxes are lowered. The sequence for twin up consists of the
hooks on the tension rod being raised followed by the twin boxes being raised. The twin consoles are now retracted until
the zero position switches are made, the retract output is active for a short off-delay after that to ensure that both units are
fully retracted. When a complete up sequence has been performed a pulse is given on the output Twin up ready pulse ,
which in turn can be used for instance to run the Spreader back to the correct single 40ft position.
42(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Project No
Version:
2005-02-23 13:40
PB4
Page:
43(92)

TWIN_DOWN
TWIN_UP
1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeft
Disconnected || !hookRight
Disconnected ]
[ twinDownReques tM ]
2 : [ !allTwinUp || !(hook
LeftDis connected &&
hookRightDis connected) ]
RAISE_BOXES
CONNECT
[ allTwinUp ]
[ !allTwinUp ]
[ hookLeftConnected && hook

RightConnected ]
1 : [ !allTwinUp ||
!hookLeftDis connected
|| !hookRight
Disconnected ]
RAISE_HOOKS
[ hookLeftDis connected &&

hookRightDis connected ]
2 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left
&& twinInZeroPosRight) ]
BOXES_DOWN
INCH_IN
2 : [ las tTwinUpStateM != OFF

_DELAY_INCH && twinInZero
Pos Left && twinInZeroPos
Right && energis eInchInM ]
[ anyTwinUp ]
[ !anyTwinUp ]
3:
HOLD_DOWN
HOLD_UP
1 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left && twinIn
ZeroPos Right) || delayM.is Tim eout() ]
H*
OFF_DELAY_INCH
Trans ition to IDLE s tate if

twinDownCom m and
H*
Trans ition to IDLE s tate if

twinUpCom m and
[ twinUpCom m and ]
[ twinDownCom m and ]
1 : [ twinDownReques tM) || (twin

DownCom m and && hookLeft
Connected && hookRightConnected ]
IDLE
2 : [ anyTwinUp && !(hook
LeftConnected && hook
RightConnected) ]
1 : [ !anyTwinUp && hook

LeftConnected && hook
RightConnected ]
2 : [ twinUpReques tM ]
3:
STARTUP
For all s tates :

DISABLED
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TwinUpDown
43(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
44(92)
8.1.9.2 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Twin box up 1
Twin box up 4
Digital
Sensor input indicating that Twin

boxes are up.
Hook connected right
Digital
Hook connected left
Digital
Sensor input indicating that right

hook is down.
Sensor input indicating that left hook
is down.
Right attach permit
Digital
Sensor input indicating that position

has been reached to attach twin boxes
on right side.
Left attach permit
Digital
Sensor input indicating that position

has been reached to attach twin boxes
on left side.
Hook disconnected right
Digital
Sensor input indicating that hook is

up on right side.
Hook disconnected left
Digital
Sensor input indicating that hook is

up on left side.
Twin in zero right
Digital

boxes has reached zero position on
right side.
Twin in zero left
Digital

boxes has reached zero position on
left side.
Chain in 40ft
Digital
Sensor input indicating that chain is

in 40ft position.
Permit twin down
Digital
Permits down motion if set to true.
Permit twin up
Digital
Permits up motion if set to true.
Twin down command
Digital
Command to send Twin boxes down.
Twin up command
Digital
Command to send Twin boxes up.
Output
Twin up ready pulse
Type
Digital
Description
Signal telling that up sequence is
completed.
Twin down
Digital
Signal to lower Twin boxes.
Twin up
Digital
Signal to raise Twin boxes.
8.1.9.3 Output port
44(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
45(92)
Disconnect twin unit left
Digital
Signal to disconnect left hook.
Disconnect twin unit right
Digital
Signal to disconnect right hook.
Connect twin unit left
Digital
Signal to connect left hook.
Connect twin unit right
Digital
Signal to connect right hook.
Inch to zero gap
Digital
Signal to inch in Twin boxes.
Inch to connect left
Digital
Signal to inch out left Twin box.
Inch to connect right
Digital
Signal to inch out right Twin box.
Parameter
Timeout Twin down
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
prompted if sequence doesnt
complete.
Timeout hook
Milliseconds
[ms]

complete.
Timeout Twin inching
Milliseconds
[ms]

complete.
Enable logging
Option

8.1.9.4 Parameters

box Enable logging.
Code
255
Message
TWIN_BOXES_UP_TIMEOUT
256
TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_UP_TIMEOUT
257
TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_UP_TIMEOUT
258
TWIN_ATTACHLEFT_TIMEOUT
259
TWIN_ATTACHRIGHT_TIMEOUT
260
TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_DN_TIMEOUT
261
TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_DN_TIMEOUT
45(92)
Description
Twin boxes have failed to get to their
upper position within time limit.
Left hook has failed to reach its' upper
Right hook has failed to reach its' upper
Twin boxes left timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
Twin-boxes right timed out when
expanding to their attach position. Failed
to reach switch within time limit.
Left hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.
Right hook has failed to reach its' lower
position (connect) within time limit.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Project No
Version:
2005-02-23 13:40
262
TWIN_BOXES_DOWN_TIMEOUT
263
TWIN_TWIN_SENSOR_LOST
264
TWIN_BOXES_UP_SENSOR_LOST
265
TWIN_HOOK_DN_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST
266
TWIN_HOOK_DN_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST
267
268
286
287
288
TWIN_HOOK_UP_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST
TWIN_HOOK_UP_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST
TWIN_UP_COMMAND
TWIN_DOWN_COMMAND
TWIN_BOXES_ARE_UP
289
TWIN_BOXES_ARE_DOWN
PB4
Page:
46(92)
Twin-boxes have failed to get to their

lower position within time limit.
Twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not
due to output).
Twin up sensor received when twinboxes are down.
Left hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
Right hook down sensor lost
unexpectedly.
Left hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
Right hook up sensor lost unexpectedly.
Twin up command has been received.
Twin down command has been received.
Twin boxes have reached their upper
position.
Twin boxes have reached their lower
position.
8.1.10 PID
8.1.10.1 Overview
The PID components are used to control fast processes, e.g. positioning, syncronisation and control of hydraulic cylinders
with special requirements.
Each PID component controls a single cylinder, but usually they ared used in pair and then 2 PID components are needed.
The PID component have the following features:
Position control
Velocity control
Syncronisation of two cylinders
Acceleration limitation
These features are described in the following sections 8.1.10.2-8.1.10.5.
The implementation and hands-on configuration are described in section 8.1.10.6.
8.1.10.2 Position control

The PID component can use either position mode or velocity mode depending on which way to coontrol it. In position
mode you give a reference position in millimeters. Then the cylinder moves to that position as fast as possible with
configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The position mode can be activated in run time.
8.1.10.3 Velocity control

In velocity mode you give a reference velocity in percent (range 100 to 100) of the maximum speed. The cylinder then
moves in correct direction and at reference speed. When giving a new reference speed the cylinder reaches that speed as
fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5).
The velocity mode can be activated in run time.
When you control the cylinder movement with a joystick velocity mode is the best way to do it.
8.1.10.4 Syncronisation of two cylinders

Some systems want to syncronise two cylinders so that they move in parallel. A syncronisation regulator is available in
the PID to handle this.
46(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
47(92)
There are two different kind of syncronisation modes:

Parallel sync
Non-parallel sync
Parallel sync is used when the cylinders must be parallel all the time. In run time you can set the difference in position
between the two cylinders. Usually this is set to zero. Parallel sync is valid for both positions mode and velocity mode.
Non-parallel sync is used when the cylinders shall move syncronised, but not in parallel. In position mode this means
that when you can move the two cylinders from separate source positions to two other separate destination positions
during the same amount of time. This means that they can move in the same direction or in different directions.
In velocity mode you can move the cylinders syncronised at a certain speed without loosing their difference in position.
You can either move them in the same direction or in different directions.
8.1.10.5 Acceleration limitation

Some systems cannot handle too high acceleration in the cylinder movements. Therefore an acceleration limiter is
installed and can be used. The limiter works for both acceleration and retardation.
The limiter is always active, independent of position/velocity mode or syncronisation mode.
8.1.10.6 Implementation
Each node are equipped with two PID components that can be used.
Each PID can control a single cylinder. All parameters for each cylinder are located in the corresponding PID. To identify
the two PIDs each component has a parameter called Regulator index which has to be set to 0 and 1 respectively.
When using sync mode both PID components cooperate and the sync parameters are taken from PID0.
For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.
8.1.10.7 Input Ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Enables regulator if set true.
Regulator mode
Digital
Sets the operational mode,

POSITION (Low level, 0) or
VELOCITY (High level, 1).
Sync parallel mode
Digital
Synchronise
Digital
Reference value
Analogue
Reference value. This signal is scaled

within the component and must not
be pre-scaled or scaled to desired
value.
(Port not visible in ABE)

Input
Sensor value
Type
Analogue
Description
Depending on regulator index the
sensor signal will be read from either
analogue input 0 or analogue input 1.
This signal is scaled within the
component and must not be prescaled.
8.1.10.8 Output Ports
47(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
48(92)
Output
Retract output (PWM)
Type
Analogue
Description
The actual value sent to the PWM
when retracting.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Expand output (PWM)
Analogue
The actual value sent to the PWM

when expanding.
Remark: This output is not really
needed cause the regulator will work
anyway. This output is used to
connect to other components for
reference only.
Retracting
Digital
This signal indicates that the

regulator is retracting.
Expanding
Digital
This signal indicates that the

regulator is expanding.
(Ports not visible in ABE)

Output
PWM 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Used for forward output (PID 0 which
is the same as Regulator index 0).
PWM 1
Analogue
Used for reverse output (PID 0 which

PWM 2
Analogue
Used for forward output (PID 1 which

PWM 3
Analogue
Used for reverse output (PID 1 which

Unit
Percent
Description
The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
8.1.10.9 Parameters
Parameter
Filter weight
[%]
Aim window
Millimetres
[mm]
The distance from the reference

position where to aim for the nonlinear regulator. It is only used in
Position mode.
Rate limiter gain
Number
This should be the frequency [Hz],

i.e. 1/sample interval.
Fraction of square root
Percent
Fraction of the non-linear regulator

signal to use. Should be between 6090.
[%]
48(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Switch window
2005-02-23 13:40
Millimetres
[mm]
Time to reach input
Milliseconds
[ms]
Sync max integrator
Percent
[%]
Sync Integral (I)
Number
[value * 1000]
Sync Proportional (P)
Number
[value * 1000]
Sample interval
Milliseconds
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
49(92)
Distance from reference position

where to switch from the non linear
regulator to the PI regulator. This
parameter must be higher than the
Aim window parameter. It is only
used in Position mode.
Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
mode.
Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
Sampling interval.
[ms]
Velocity window
Percent
[%]
Position window
Millimetres
[mm]
Device length
Millimetres
[mm]
When regulating velocity and if the

Reference value is inside Velocity
window it is interpreted as zero.
When regulating position the
cylinder will stop when it reaches
reference position +/- Position
window.
Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
Insignal max
Number
Maximum insignal from analogue

input.
Insignal min
Number
Minimum insignal from analogue

input.
R Half PWM time
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time for transportation between

Device length and 0 at R Half PWM.
R Max PWM time
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time for transportation between

Device length and 0 at R Max PWM.
R Min PWM
Number
Minimum PWM output that causes

movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
R Half PWM
Number
PWM output between R Min PWM

and R Max PWM.
Approx. (R Min PWM + R Max
PWM) / 2
R Max PWM
Number
49(92)
Minimum PWM output at max

speed. (Upper threshold limit).
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
50(92)
F Half PWM time
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time for transportation between 0

and Device length at F Half PWM.
F Max PWM time
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time for transportation between 0

and Device length at F Max PWM.
F Min PWM
Number
Minimum PWM output that causes

movement of piston. (Lower
threshold limit).
F Half PWM
Number
PWM output between F Min PWM

and F Max PWM.
Approx. (F Min PWM + F Max
PWM) / 2
F Max PWM
Number
Minimum PWM output at max

speed. (Upper threshold limit).
Pos. Integral (I)
Number
Integral part of PI regulator. Only

used in Position mode.
[value * 1000]
Pos. Proportional (P)
Number
[value * 1000]
Acceleration limit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Regulator index
Number
Proportional part of PI regulator.

Only used in Position mode.
Minimum time for valve to open full
and to close full.
Index 0 corresponds to PWM0,
PWM1 and analogue input 0.
Node
Option
Location of regulator. Choose

between B1 B8 and A1 A4.
Store mode
Option
Select which parameters to use:

ALL PARAMS: use all parameters
from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
REGULATOR PARAMS: use only
the regulator parameters from
NVRAM stored by AutoTuner
LINEAR PARAMS: use only linear
parameters from NVRAM stored by
AutoTuner
ABE ONLY: use parameters only
from Spreader program file
8.1.11 AutoTuner
This component is intended as a help when setting up the PID component. It will automatically move the cylinder(s) and
measuring its characteristics when component is enabled. If one intentions are to synchronize two cylinders with PID
components, its possible to adapt the two cylinders with the use of this component. This is done by enabling the check
box Prepare for sync parameter.
50(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
51(92)
The AutoTuner will store its measured parameters in the onboard NVRAM. These parameters can then be uploaded and
monitored/transferred to the matching PID component. It is important that the Record name is identical to the PID that is
supposed to use the auto tuned parameters.
For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID
component and AutoTuner component.
8.1.11.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Enables component if set true. When
the enable input goes from 0 to 1 the
auto tune procedure is restarted.
Slave
Analogue
Sensor input signal for the slave

cylinder. Only needed if prepare for
sync is checked.
Main
Analogue
Sensor input signal for the cylinder to

auto tune.
Output
Finished
Type
Digital
Description
Output for telling when tuning is
complete.
Slave Retract
Analogue
Output for retracting slave cylinder.

Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Slave Expand
Analogue
Output for expanding slave cylinder.

Only needed if prepare for sync is
checked. This shall be connected to
the PWM output for the slave
cylinder.
Main Retract
Analogue
Output for retracting main cylinder.

This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.
Main Expand
Analogue
Output for expanding main cylinder.

This shall be connected to the PWM
output for the cylinder to auto tune.
Unit
Description
8.1.11.3 Parameters
Parameter
51(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Position window
2005-02-23 13:40
Millimeter
[mm]
Velocity window
Percents
[%]
Sync Proportional [P]
Number
[value * 1000]
Sync Integral [I]
Number
[value * 1000]
Sync max integrator
Percents
[%]
Time to reach input
Milliseconds
[ms]
Fraction of square root
Percents
[%]
Filter weight
Percents
[%]
Natural frequency
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
52(92)
When regulating position the

cylinder will stop when it reaches
reference position +/- Position
window.
When regulating velocity and if the
Reference value is inside Velocity
window it is interpreted as zero.
Proportional part in sync regulator. It
is only used in Sync mode.
Integral part in sync regulator. It is
only used in Sync mode.
Maximum integrator percent in sync
mode. It is only used in Sync mode.
Time to reach full effect of reference
velocity. It is only used in Velocity
mode.
Fraction of the non-linear regulator
signal to use. Should be between 6090.
The percentage weight of the
previously filtered signal.
Number
[value * 1000]
Moderation factor
Number
[value * 1000]
Regulator index
Number

Sample interval
Milliseconds
Sampling interval.
[ms]
Acceleration limit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Device length
Millimetre
[mm]
Timeout
Milliseconds
[ms]
Record name
Text
52(92)
Minimum time for valve to open full

and to close full.
Length of cylinder that is to be
controlled.
Timeout for a full cylinder stroke.
This parameter must be greater than
the tiem it takes for the cylinder to
perform a full stroke.
The instance name of the matching
PID component.
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Prepare for sync
Option
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
53(92)
This shall be enabled when using

syncronisation between two
cylinders. Adapts the faster cylinder
to the slower one.

fault and event log onboard the SCS2.
Code
385
8.2
8.2.1
Message
AUTOTUNER_STORED_IN_NVRAM
Description
The component has stored its
parameters in NVRAM.
AnyBus
Introduction
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the Anybus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an Anybus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the Anybus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes
out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the
Master and the SCS2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.
8.2.1.1 Mapping of I/O

OUT
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
outputs
IN
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
inputs
Output Segment
In the output segment it is possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The diagnostics
are handled by the Anybus System component. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard
display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for
53(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
54(92)
indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and
therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic
message is transmitted. The start position of the diagnostic areas is configurable.
8.2.1.2 Spreader diagnostic area.

The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0
=> Type of error (info, warning, error)
Byte 1
=> Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates)
Byte 2-3 (WORD)
=> Diagnostic code
Byte 4-5 (WORD)
=> Sub Code for diagnostics
Byte 6-7 (WORD)
=> Sequential counter value (message number)
8.2.1.3 System diagnostic area.

This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The
objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip ABs R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the
customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its equipment further, however the
customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following
way.
The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component.
Byte 0
=> Node ID
Byte 1-2 (WORD)
=> Row Number (of source code)
Byte 3-8 (3 x WORD)
=> Filename (1:st 6 char.)
Byte 9-10 (WORD)
=> Sequential counter
The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The
assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader.
These assignments are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and
set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
8.2.2
Anybus System
The Anybus system component has the ability to handle downloading of new spreader program (*.spr).
Note: To be able to download a spreader program via Anybus a specific PC software is needed.
8.2.2.1 Input ports

Input
Download start
Type
Digital
Description
If set true, component expects
download data on Anybus.
Parameter
Node
Unit
Node id
Description
The node identity of the node where
the Anybus interface is located.
Log active
Option
Indicates if the log should be

exported to the Anybus interface or
not.
8.2.2.2 Parameters
54(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.2.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
55(92)
Log address
0-63
The Anybus output address in the

access area where the log should be
exported.
Assert active
Option
Indicates if the assert log should be

exported to the Anybus interface or
not.
Assert address
0-63
The Anybus output address in the

access area where the assert log
should be exported.
Type
Analogue
Description
Input from analogue input port.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Free text field. Use this field for
notes about the Anybus port.
Word number
Number
Word in Anybus interface to which

the value from IN is to be
transferred to.
Node
Node id

Type
Analogue
Description
Input from analogue input port.
Unit
Text
Description
Output Word
8.2.3.1 Input ports

Input
IN
8.2.3.2 Parameters
8.2.4
Output Byte
8.2.4.1 Input ports

Input
IN
8.2.4.2 Parameters
Parameter
Note
55(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.2.5
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
56(92)
Byte number
Number
Byte in Anybus interface to which

the value from IN is to be
transferred to.
Node
Node id

Type
Digital
Description
Input from digital input port.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Byte number
Number
Start byte in Anybus interface.
Bit number
Number
Bit number of the chosen byte in

Anybus interface.
Node
Node id

Type
Analogue
Description
The word number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the OUT value.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Word number
Analogue
The word within the Anybus

interface from which
Output Bit
8.2.5.1 Input ports

Input
IN
8.2.5.2 Parameters
8.2.6
Input Word

Output
OUT
8.2.6.2 Parameters
56(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Node
8.2.7
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
57(92)
Node id

Type
Analogue
Description
The byte number from the Anybus
interface that is to be transferred to
the OUT value.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Byte number
Number
Node
Node id

Type
Digital
Description
Digital value from Anybus interface.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Byte number
Number
Bit number
Number
Bit number in Anybus interface.
Node
Node id

Input Byte

Output
OUT
8.2.7.2 Parameters
8.2.8
Input Bit

Output
OUT
8.2.8.2 Parameters
57(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.3
8.3.1
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
58(92)
CANopen
Introduction
CANopen is a field bus protocol based on CAN and provides a flexible and powerful open industrial communication
solution.
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes the SCS2 master node can control up to 15 CANopen slaves. The SCS2 master
node acts as a CANopen master, this includes network management, SDO services and PDO handling.
The SCS2 master node processes the CANopen slave data i.e reads inputs and controls outputs.
All configuration of the CANopen functionality is made in the CANopen IO configuration view described in section
5.2.4. Note that the components described in the following section is not visible in the component palette.
The following components is used to create CANopen IO and SDO objects.
8.3.2
PDO Read Bit

Output
OUT
Type
Digital
Description
Digital value from CANopen slave
Parameter
Slave node ID
Unit
Number
Description
Node id of CANopen slave
PDO number
Number
PDO number
Byte Number
Number
Byte in PDO
Bit number
Number
Bit in byte
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value from CANopen slave
Parameter
Slave node ID
Unit
Number
Description
PDO number
Number
PDO number
Start Byte in PDO
Number
Start Byte in PDO
Start Bit number
Number
Start bit in Byte
8.3.2.2 Parameters
8.3.3
PDO Read

Output
OUT
8.3.3.2 Parameters
58(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Data Length
8.3.4
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
59(92)
Number
Length of data
Type
Digital
Description
Digital value written to CANopen
slave
Parameter
Slave node ID
Unit
Number
Description
PDO number
Number
PDO number
Byte in PDO
Number
Byte in PDO
Bit number
Number
Bit in Byte
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value written to CANopen
slave
Parameter
Slave node ID
Unit
Number
Description
PDO number
Number
PDO number
Start Byte in PDO
Number
Start Byte in PDO
Start Bit number
Number
Start Bit in Byte
Data Length
Number
Length of data
Unit
Number
Description
PDO Write Bit
8.3.4.1 Input ports

Input
Input
8.3.4.2 Parameters
8.3.5
PDO Write
8.3.5.1 Input ports

Input
Input
8.3.5.2 Parameters
8.3.6
SDO Write
8.3.6.1 Parameters
Parameter
Slave node ID
59(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
60(92)
OD index
Number
Index in OD (dec)
OD sub index
Number
Sub index in OD
Value
Number
Value written to OD
Size of data
Option
Unsigned 8: The size of data(value)

is 1 byte
is 2 byte
is 4 byte
Sequence number
Number
60(92)
Specifies in which order all SDO

objects will be sent
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.4
8.4.1
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
61(92)
Guards
Spreader stop
The Spreader stop component stops all output functions from Spreader specific components, controllers, and causes them
to go back to a boot state upon the release of the Spreader stop. It also generates a message to the log
8.4.1.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
Command to stop spreader.
true = spreader stops
false = spreader stop resumed
8.4.1.2 Parameters
Parameter
Enable logging
Unit
Option
Description

box Enable logging
Code
97
8.4.2
Message
SPREADER_STOP
Description
Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated.
0 = deactivated, 1 = activated.
TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System
The TTDS component implements the functionality of the twin twenty detection system, which is used to prevent lifting
two twenty foot containers in a forty foot single lift position. The function should only be active to prevent wrongful
lifting and not to actively control any other device. The logic is based on the Bromma seven sensor system and the output
can be used to interlock the Twistlocks, but should also always when possible be sent to the crane. Since the logic is
designed to be fail-safe, any type of fault of sensor or a misreading by the sensor will trigger the output and therefore an
override has been implemented. For details regarding the TTDS system functionality see separate manual. The TTDS
component generates log messages every time an override has been used.
8.4.2.1 Input ports

Input
Override
Type
Digital
Description
Overrides TTDS result.
true = output (Twin) is always false
false = normal output
61(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Sensor 1
...
Sensor 7
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
Digital
Input from TTDS sensors.
Type
Digital
Description
true = two containers detected
62(92)

Output
OUT
false = one or none detected

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the
box Enable logging.
Code
290
291
8.4.3
Message
TTDS_OVERRIDE_ACTIVATED
TTDS_OVERRIDE_DEACTIVATED
Description
Override request received.
Override request ended.
Analogue guard
The Analogue guard is intended for use of monitoring a specific analogue value. A window around the min/max values
can be defined. This component generates a log message classified as a warning, which is user defined. There are 10 (0-9)
unique message tags to choose from and they generate the messages 146 155 within the log system. Apart from sending
a message to the log, an output can trigger any other event if the input value exceeds the ranges specified in the
parameters of the component.
8.4.3.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.
Type
Digital
Description
Signal indicating that Analogue input
has gone outside lower or upper limit
longer than the specified time Delay.
Unit
Description

Output
OUT
8.4.3.3 Parameters
Parameter
62(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
63(92)
Note
Text
Descriptive string indicating the

function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Delay
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time until warning message is

prompted if Analogue input has gone
out of boundaries.
Lower limit
Number
Lower limit of allowable input range.
Upper limit
Number
Upper limit of allowable input range.
Warning code
Option
Warning code that will identify the

component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)
Enable logging
Option


box Enable logging.
Code
146
155
8.4.4
Message
USERDEFINED_0
...
USERDEFINED_9
Description
User chooses what message to use. The messages
generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read
out of the log.
Digital guard
The Digital guard triggers a user-defined message to be stored in the log.
8.4.4.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
Digital value from other component
or digital input port.
Parameter
Note
Unit
Text
Description
Descriptive string indicating the
function of the component. (Only
registered within ABE as memory
note)
Input NO/NC
Option
Normally open or normally closed

behaviour on input.
8.4.4.2 Parameters
63(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
64(92)
Delay
Milliseconds
[ms]
Time until warning message is

prompted if digital value is true or
false (depending on input NO / NC
setting).
Warning code
Option
Warning code that will identify the

component. (Same code can be used
for different components.)
Enable logging
Option


box Enable logging.
Code
146
155
8.5
Message
USERDEFINED_0
...
USERDEFINED_9
Description
User chooses what message to use. The messages generated
in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.
Gates
This section contains the simple Boolean instruction set.
8.5.1
AND
This function block performs the function of the logical AND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
OUT
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
8.5.1.1 Input ports

Input
IN0
...
IN n
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from AND
operation.

Output
OUT
64(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
65(92)
8.5.1.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs
8.5.2
Unit
Number
Description
Number of inputs on component.
NAND
This function block performs the function of the logical NAND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
OUT
1
1
1
0
8.5.2.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
...
IN n
Type
Digital
Description
Digital values from other component
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from NAND
operation.
Unit
Number
Description

Output
OUT
8.5.2.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs
8.5.3
NOR
This function block performs the function of the logical NOR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
OUT
1
0
0
0
65(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
66(92)
8.5.3.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
...
IN n
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from NOR
operation.
Unit
Number
Description

Output
OUT
8.5.3.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs
8.5.4
OR
This function block performs the function of the logical OR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
OUT
0
1
1
1
8.5.4.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
...
IN n
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from OR
operation.

Output
OUT
66(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
67(92)
8.5.4.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of inputs
8.5.5
Unit
Number
Description
NOT
This function block performs the function of the logical NOT with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings.
Basic function
IN
OUT
0
1
1
0
8.5.5.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from NOT
operation.

Output
OUT
8.5.6
XOR
This function block performs the function of the logical XOR (exclusive or) with the number of inputs specified in the
parameter settings.
Basic function
IN 0
IN n
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
OUT
0
1
1
0
8.5.6.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
Type
Digital
Description
IN 1
Digital

67(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
68(92)

Output
OUT
8.5.7
Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from XOR
operation.
SR Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical SR latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will reset (output goes low).
8.5.7.1 Input ports

Input
Set
Type
Digital
Description
Reset
Digital

Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from SR latch.

Output
OUT
8.5.8
RS Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical RS latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter
settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input.
If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will set (output goes high).
8.5.8.1 Input ports

Input
Set
Type
Digital
Description
Reset
Digital

Type
Digital
Description
Digital output result from RS latch.

Output
Result
68(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.5.9
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
69(92)
Logical gate
The Logical gate component is used if one wishes to perform logical operations (bit wise) on two analogue values.
Each analogue input is represented as a 32 bit value.
8.5.9.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
component will set Result to zero.
(i.e. enabled all time).
IN 1
Analogue
Input value 1.
IN 2
Analogue
Input value 2.
Type
Analogue
Description
Result of logical operation.
Unit
Option
Description
Determents type of logical operation
preformed on IN 1 and IN 2. The
operations available are AND, OR
and XOR.

Output
Result
8.5.9.3 Parameters
Parameter
Operation mode
8.6
8.6.1
Digital
OD Timer On Delay Timer
The On Delay Timer is used to delay a signal from input to output.
8.6.1.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
or digital input port. Starts the timer
on positive flank.
Type
Description

Output
69(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
OUT
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
70(92)
Digital
Digital output that goes high if the

input is high and the specified time
has elapsed.
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Time that the in put signal is to be
delayed before the output goes high
8.6.1.3 Parameters
Parameter
Delay
8.6.2
UpDn Counter Up Down Counter
The Up Down Counter increments each time the UP input transits from low to high and decrements each time the DOWN
input transits from low to high. The RESET input takes the counter value to zero.
The range of the counter is from 0 to 231-1 (=2147483647).
8.6.2.1 Input ports

Input
Up
Type
Digital
Description
Increments the counter value
Down
Digital
Decrements the counter value
Reset
Digital
Sets the counter value to zero
Output
OUT
Type
Digital
Description
OUT = 1 (high) when the counter
value is equal to or above the
specified value in the parameter
listing
Counter value
Analogue
The current value of the counter
Unit
Digital
Description
The counter value when the digital
output goes high. The output is on
when the counter value is equal to or
above this value.
8.6.2.3 Parameters
Parameter
Trigger count
8.6.3
OSC - Oscillator
The oscillator purely switches the output on and off with specified duty cycle adjusted in the parameters.
8.6.3.1 Input ports
70(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
Input
Enable
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
71(92)
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Clock pulse output.
Unit
Milliseconds
[ms]
Description
Cycle time for Clock output.

Output
OUT
8.6.3.3 Parameters
Parameter
Cycle time
8.6.4
Split
The split component is used to generate two or more signals available for connection from one signal line. I.e. it can in
many cases replace the use of intermediate variables, since the signal value of the input and the outputs are always the
same.
8.6.4.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Digital
Description
Type
Digital
Description
Outputs have same status as the IN
input port
Unit
Number
Description
Number of outputs on component.

Output
OUT 0
OUT n
8.6.4.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of outputs
8.6.5
Pulse
The Pulse component is used to generate a pulse. The duration of the pulse is set by a parameter. The pulse can be trigged
on either positive or negative flank. The pulse is restarted if an new active flank is detected during the pulse.
An output indicating time left until pulse is unlit is also available.
71(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
72(92)
8.6.5.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Input
Digital
Trigger for starting pulse.
Output
Time remaining
Type
Analogue
Description
Time remaining (ms) until pulse is
unlit.
Output
Digital
Pulse output.
Parameter
Active flank
Unit
Option
Description
Determines active flank of trigger,
POS or NEG.
Length of pulse
Milliseconds
[ms]
Duration of pulse.
8.6.5.3 Parameters
8.7
8.7.1
Miscellaneous
Constant
The Constant component is used to store a Boolean or Analogue value as a constant variable to use within the logic. Note
that any other value than zero is considered as a logical one when using this component for digital purposes.

Output
Digital
Type
Digital
Description
Constant value > 0 : Digital output
= true
Constant value = 0 : Digital output
= false
Analogue
Analogue
Analogue output = Constant value
Unit
Description
8.7.1.2 Parameters
Parameter
72(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Value
8.7.2
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Number
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
73(92)
Value to put on output ports.
Dead end
The Dead End component is used when one has to make a system where one or more of the mandatory outputs cannot be
used for some reason. By connecting the Mandatory output from another component to the Dead end component that
signal is terminated. This can be useful when controller components are to be used purely for log purposes and one
doesnt want the logic to control the outputs.
8.7.3
Output
Digital IN
Type
Digital
Description
Terminates a digital connection.
Analogue IN
Analogue
Terminates an analogue connection.
Input
Twin boxes are down
Type
Digital
Description
Input port telling that twin boxes are
down.
Landed
Digital
Input port telling that spreader has

landed.
Locked
Digital
Input port telling that all Twist locks

are locked.
Unlocked
Digital
Input port telling that all Twist locks

is unlocked.
Pump 1 on
Digital
Used for activating the clock for

drive time 1. When this input is
active the clock for drive time 1
counts.
Pump 2 on
Digital

counts.
Pump 3 on
Digital

counts.
Type
Description
Spreader properties
8.7.3.1 Input ports

Output
73(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
74(92)
Number of lock operations on twin
Analogue
Number of lock operations

performed on twin Twist locks.
Saved in external EEPROM.
Number of lock operations on single
Analogue
Number of lock operations

performed on single Twist locks.
Number of containers
Analogue
Number of containers handled. When

twin is down this number is
incremented by two. Saved in
external EEPROM.
Spreader serial number
Analogue
Spreader unique number. User

defined. Read from external
EEPROM.
Drawing number
Analogue
Spreader unique number. User

defined. Read from parameter
Drawing number.
Counter clock pulse
Digital
Clock pulse that toggles from false to

true when container is handled.
When a new sequence is ended
output goes back to false.
Drive time 1 HI Word
Analogue
Accumulated drive time since

delivery. The time is only measured
when pump 1 is active. The time is
divided into two words (2x16bits)
where this output is the high word.
Drive time 1 LO Word
Analogue

where this output is the low word.
Analogue

Analogue

74(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
75(92)
Analogue

Analogue

Parameter
Enable logging
Unit
Option
Description
Drawing number
Number
User defined number. Number is

used to present the drawing number
of the spreader.
8.7.3.3 Parameters

box Enable logging.
Code
318
319
320
321
322
323
8.7.4
Message
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_E
EPROM
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_D
S
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_DIFF
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP
ROM_OK
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP
ROM_FAIL
SPREADER_PROPERTIES_NEW_N
ODE_TO_EEPROM
Description
Last saved properties are read from
EEPROM.
System has read properties from NVRAM.
Spreader properties read from EEPROM
and NVRAM differ.
System succeeded to write properties to
EEPROM.
System failed to write properties to
EEPROM.
System detected that a new node is
connected since last shut down.
Memory
The Memory component is used when one wishes to write or read an analogue value from or to the NVRAM.
8.7.4.1 Input ports

Input
Type
75(92)
Description
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
76(92)
Enable
Digital

component will set the Analogue
OUT to zero. Default value if not
connected is true (i.e. no effect).
Write
Digital
If set true, component reads

Analogue IN and writes to NVRAM.
Read
Digital
If set true, component reads from

NVRAM and writes to Analogue
OUT.
Analogue IN
Analogue
Analoge value that is to be stored.
Type
Analogue
Description
Value stored in NVRAM.

Output
Analogue OUT
8.7.5
Digital buffer
The Digital buffer component buffers digital values for a selected amount of execution cycles.
8.7.5.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
Digital IN
Digital
Digital value that is to be buffered.
Type
Digital
Description
Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
next cycle and so on.
Unit
Number
Description
Number of cycles to remember.

Output
OUT 0
..
OUT n
8.7.5.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of samples to hold
8.7.6
Analogue buffer
The Analogue buffer component buffers analogue values for a selected amount of execution cycles.
76(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
77(92)
8.7.6.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
zero. Default value if not connected
Analogue IN
Analogue
Analogue value that is to be buffered.
Type
Analogue
Description
Buffered values. The input value is
shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The
same value is shown on OUT 1 the
next cycle and so on.
Unit
Number
Description
Number of cycles to remember.

Output
OUT 0
..
OUT n
8.7.6.3 Parameters
Parameter
Number of samples to hold
77(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.8
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
78(92)
Analogue
The Analogue components are used to work with analogue values.
8.8.1
RS485 port
This component is used to access the RS485 interface. Depending on what protocol is chosen from the parameter view
the component can be used for a variety of purposes.

Output
OUT
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value of output from
sensor
Parameter
Protocol
Unit
Option
Description
Type of protocol used (i.e. vendor
specific protocol). Only SLIN is
implemented SSI is implemeted.
Node
Option
Node the RS485 sensor is connected

to.
Code Type
Option
Applys only if SSI protocol is

selected
Input resolution
Number
Applys only if SSI protocol is

selected. Specifies the resolution of
the component.
Input
IN 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Input
IN 1
Analogue
Input
Type
Digital
Description
IN 0 > IN 1 gives OUT = 1
IN 0 <= IN 1 gives OUT = 0
8.8.1.2 Parameters
8.8.2
IN0 > IN1
8.8.2.1 Input ports

Output
OUT
78(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.8.3
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
79(92)
IN0 * IN1
8.8.3.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Input
IN 1
Analogue
Input
Type
Analogue
Description
OUT = IN 0 * IN 1
Input
IN 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Nominator input
IN 1
Analogue
Denominator input
Type
Analogue
Description
OUT = IN 0 / IN 1
Input
IN 0
Type
Analogue
Description
Input
IN 1
Analogue
Input
Type
Analogue
Description
OUT = IN 0 IN 1

Output
OUT
8.8.4
IN0 / IN1
Note. Always avoid division by zero.
8.8.4.1 Input ports

Output
OUT
8.8.5
IN0 IN1
8.8.5.1 Input ports

Output
OUT
79(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.8.6
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
80(92)
IN0 + IN1
8.8.6.1 Input ports

Input
IN 0
...
IN n
Type
Analogue
Description
Inputs to be added together
Type
Analogue
Description
OUT = IN 0 + IN 1+, ,+ IN n
Unit
Number
Description
Number of input ports on component.

Output
OUT
8.8.6.3 Parameters
Parameter
Input counter
8.8.7
Scale
The Scale components scales a analogue value according to the formula,

OUT = ((scaledMax scaledMin)/(INMax-INMin))*(IN - INMin) + scaledMin,
which performs a linear scaling with an offset according to OUT = k*IN + m.
8.8.7.1 Input ports

Input
IN
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value from other
component or analogue input port.
Type
Analogue
Description
Scaled analogue value with
constraints from parameter listing.
Parameter
Max value after scale
Unit
Number
Description
Largest scaled value.
Min value after scale
Number
Smallest scaled value.

Output
OUT
8.8.7.3 Parameters
80(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
8.8.8
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
Max value of input
Number
The maximum value of input.
Min value of input
Number
The minimum value of input.
81(92)
AnalogueLatch
The Analogue latch is a component that stores a value internally when triggered by a digital input. The value stored in an
internal variable can be read at the output of the component. As long as the digital trigger input is active the input value is
directly transferred to the output value and as soon as the digital input goes low the output value remains constant at the
current value until a new digital command is given.
8.8.8.1 Input ports

Input
Enable
Type
Digital
Description
IN
Digital
Input that trigger the component to

read the value IN Value.
IN Value
Analogue
Input value that is read and stored in

the component
Type
Analogue
Description
The stored value of the component

Output
OUT
8.8.9
Filter
The Filter component is used to filter analogue signals from noise.
8.8.9.1 Input ports

Input
Analogue IN
Type
Analogue
Description
Unfiltered signal.
Type
Analogue
Description
Filtered signal.

Output
Analogue OUT
81(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
82(92)
8.8.9.3 Parameters
Parameter
Filter type
Unit
Option
Description
Determines type of filter. Only
MOVING AVR is implemented.
Filter weight
Number [%]
Determents how many percents of

previous filtered signal that is to be
used.
Output
Port 5
Type
Analogue
Description
Analogue value
Port 4
Analogue
Analogue value
Unit
Option
Description
Specifies the node.
8.8.10 AuxAnalogue
This component implements two more analogue inputs.
8.8.10.2 Parameters
Parameter
Node
82(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
83(92)
9 T utorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of designing a Spreader program using ABE.
Steps covered in this tutorial.
Creating a new project
System view
Pin configuration
Component view
Load view
Step 1: Creating a new project
Start ABE from your Start menu if it isnt already started. If you just started ABE you already have a project created for
you, If not create a new one by clicking the button showed in the picture below.
Figure 9:1 Create project

Step 2: System view
Activate the node B2 by checking corresponding Active checkbox. Node B1 is always present in the system.
Figure 9:2 Activating nodes
Fill in the Value fields in the parameter listing. Note that some of the fields are not editable.
Figure 9:3 Setting system parameters
83(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
84(92)
Step 3: Pin configuration

All present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. Make sure tab B1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 1 and 2 the
following names. Comment field is optional.
Figure 9:4 Setting item identifiers on node B1

Make sure tab B2 is activated in the view and do the same for Port id# 1 to 4.
Note: The red colour of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected.
Figure 9:5 Setting item identifiers on node B2

Step 4: Component view
Select the FAC component from the available component pallet.
Figure 9:6 Choosing component

If available components pallet is not visible. Activate it by clicking at the Components button shown in picture below.
84(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
85(92)
Figure 9:7 Bringing up Available components
Place the component on Page 1 in the view.
Figure 9:8 Default look of FAC component

Note: Connections with red colour indicate that they are not yet connected. Connections with white colour indicate that
they are optional to connect.
Double click on the component to open Properties for the FAC component. Change the property Number of Flippers to 2.
Figure 9:9 Changing properties for FAC component
85(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
86(92)
The new appearance for the component should look like this:
Figure 9:10 Look of FAC component after changing number of flippers
By placing the pointer over the component or one of its connections a hint (tool tip) will appear. The hint tells you about
the properties for the component or its connection.
Figure 9:11 Look of component hint
Click with your right mouse button over a connection on the component. A pop up menu will appear. Move the cursor as
shown in the picture below and click on your left mouse button over Flipper_Down.
Figure 9:12 Making component connections
86(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
87(92)
Your component should now look like this:
Figure 9:13 Appearance of a connection

Continue with the remaining connections until you have all connections connected.
If you want to disconnect a connection you click over the connection with your right mouse button and choose disconnect
when it appears.
When your system is complete there should not be any red coloured connections in the Component view or Item
identifiers in the Pin configuration view.
Your Component view should look like Figure 12 when all your connections are made.
Figure 9:14 Appearance of a connection
Now you are ready to generate downloadable Spreader program file. Select Compile from the File menu.
If the following message box appears your system is not configured properly. Look for red coloured connections or item
identifiers. If port is configured to be used but isnt you must delete it.
Save the output file (when compiling the spreader program) with the name tutorial.spr.
Figure 9:15 The Spreader program contains errors
When you have generated your downloadable program file it can be found at the location where it was saved. You must
not edit this file.
87(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
88(92)
Step 5: Load view

Downloading spreader programs
1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
In the picture below COM1 is selected.
Figure 9:16 Select Connection

2.
3.
4.
Press the Download button.

Point out the spreader program that you want to download. (Spreader programs have extension *.spr).
Observe the status bars. If connected node is the master node no distribution between nodes will appear. If not the
master node is the point of connection the spreader program will first be downloaded to the local node (connected
node) and than distributed to the master node.
Uploading spreader programs

1.

2. Press the Upload button.
The two following dialogues will appear in sequence.
Answer Yes to the first dialog if you are working on anything that you want to save else No.
Figure 9:18 Save current spreader program

Answer Yes to the second dialog to open the uploaded spreader program in the editor. (If you press No, you have to
manually open the uploaded spreader program.)
Figure 9:19 Open spreader program in ABE

3. Observe the status bar ABE --> Connected node.
When 100% is reached the uploaded spreader program will appear in the editor.
88(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
89(92)
Step 6: Online monitoring

Online monitoring is performed under Component view.
1.
Make sure you have the same spreader program in ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always
download your current spreader program or upload the spreader program from the SCS2 (see Step 5).
2.

3.
Make sure Auto is not checked.
Figure 9:21 Deselect Auto option

If Auto is checked, automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval.
4.
Start online monitoring
Figure 9:22 Start online monitoring

The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or
less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears
above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status.
Once the online monitoring is started, the design window is locked for editing. If you want to monitor another part of
your design (not visible at the moment); you have to stop the online monitoring and then scroll to that part and start the
monitoring again.
5.
Update online values by pressing the Update button.
Figure 9:23 Updated online values
89(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
6.
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
90(92)
Stop online monitoring by pressing button as shown below.
Figure 9:24 Stop online monitoring
10 CANopen tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of configuring a Spreader program containing CANopen functionality.
The tutorial covers the following steps:
Add a CANopen slave
Add an input
Connecting input to Spreader logic
Step 1: Add a CANopen slave
In the Component view activate the CANopen configuration view by clicking CANopen IO button.
In this view click the Add slave button.
Figure 1. Add slave button

When this button is clicked the following view appears.
Here you can configure:
Type of slave (predefined connection set or not).
The name of the slave
Slave options (CRITICAL or NON CRITICAL).
Adress of slave 1-126
Click OK button when done
Figure 2. Slave properties
90(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
91(92)
Step 2: Add a CANopen input

Make sure that the I/O leaf in the tree view is selected as in the picture below.
Click on the Add input button.
Figure 2. Add input

The following view appears.
Figure 3. Input properties

In this view the properties of this input is set.
Name of the input (in this example IN_1)
PDO number
Byte number
Bit number
Data length
Click OK button when done
The CANopen I/O configuration view now looks like the picture below.
Figure 4. CANopen I/O cunfiguration view after input is added
91(92)
2000
Document:
Project:
ABE_UserManual_1.0
Prepared by:
Date:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2005-02-23 13:40
Project No
Version:
PB4
Page:
92(92)
Step 3: Connecting CANopen input to Spreader logic

When no more configuration is to be done click the OK button to return to the Pin configuration view
Add a component to page and right click on the input to bring up the pop up window
Select the CANopen menu and the slave on where the input is configured and click on your left mouse button.
Figure 5. Making component connections

Your component should now look like this:
92(92)
2000
User Manual
BMS - Light
Version 1.0
Revision
Issued by
Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB

2000-08-22
2000-10-13
2000-10-23
PA4
2001-01-10
PA5
A
B
C
Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems AB

Ken Lindfors, CC Systems AB
Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB
Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB
2001-10-29
2002-06-12
2003-06-11
2004-08-10
PA1
PA2
PA3
Date
Printed: 04-8-12 9.15
Measures
First draft.
Added modem functions.
Changes in GUI. Cancel buttons added. Height changed
on cells in string grids.
Changes in GUI. Cancel button moved. Some Anybus
functions added.
New pages added. CAN tester, Boot loader.
Minor changes after release of System 1.04.
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
2(20)
Table of contents
1
2
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Installing BMS Light .................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.1
HW requirements................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................. 3
2.3
Disclaimer.............................................................................................................................................................. 3
3 User interface................................................................................................................................................................. 4
3.1
Menu (top toolbar) options: ................................................................................................................................... 4
3.2
Status bars in main window................................................................................................................................... 5
4 Download view.............................................................................................................................................................. 6
5 Get log view .................................................................................................................................................................. 7
5.1
Filtering constraints ............................................................................................................................................... 8
6 I/O status view............................................................................................................................................................... 9
7 Misc. view ................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Anybus view........................................................................................................................................................................ 11
8 Spreader info view....................................................................................................................................................... 12
9 CANopen IO view ....................................................................................................................................................... 13
10
Upload view............................................................................................................................................................. 14
11
Advanced................................................................................................................................................................. 15
11.1 CAN Tester.......................................................................................................................................................... 15
11.2 Boot Loader ......................................................................................................................................................... 17
11.3 Asserts ................................................................................................................................................................. 18
11.4 POM Loader ........................................................................................................................................................ 19
11.5 Bluetooth ............................................................................................................................................................. 19
11.6 CANopen services ............................................................................................................................................... 20
2(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
3(20)
Introduction
The BMS is a software tool used for monitoring and handling the Bromma system SCS2. This manual assumes the user
has good knowledge of the SCS2 system as well as Windows environments.
Installing BMS Light

HW requirements
An Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000.

At least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2).
At least 1Mb of free disk space.
Installation
Close any other applications running under Windows.

Insert the first disc into your disc station (if installing from disc)
Run the file BMSSetup.exe from the BMS folder on your provided disk.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved.
Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners.
Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes
and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice.
Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.
3(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
4(20)
User interface
Menu (top toolbar) options:
File:
Exit --- Terminates the application.
View:
Activates selected tab [Download, Get log, I/O status, Misc., Anybus, Spreader info, Upload]
Tools:
Connect serial cable: activates selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
Connect modem: activates modem connected to selected communication port [COM1, COM2].
The dialog below is used for making the connection. Once a connection has been made the dialog window disappears.
The BMS commands are working via the modem if the modem has connected successfully.
Modem connection
Connect to node: connects BMS to selected node [B1, B2,..., B8, A1, A2, A3, A4]. This connection is made over RS232
link through the CAN bus. Normally select Local node.
Advanced options: Intended for Bromma R&D personnel.
Help:
About: shows the version of the BMS.
4(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
5(20)
Status bars in main window

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Status of last performed operation. Intended for Bromma personnel.

Status of current operation.
Serial cable connection (COM1 or COM2).
Destination node (normally Local node) of all operations.
Status of serial cable connection.
2
3
1
Main window
5(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
6(20)
Download view
This tab is used to download the entire system program to the system. Note. It takes a considerable amount of time to
update the system program and therefore make sure that the system can be down for this amount of time.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Transfer status from BMS to the connected node [4]. PC downloading to the connected node.
Transfer status from connected node [4] to node [5]. Distribution of the program via the bus lines to the other nodes
on the bus.
Total transfer status. Status of complete system to be downloaded.
Connected node (to PC).
Receiving node when distributing between nodes.
Select file to download. Press here to select the file to be downloaded. When file is selected download process starts.
Cancels current transfer to connected node. The operation just cancels the feedback of transfer status if distribution
between nodes has started (i.e. the operation will not effect the transfer in this case).
3
6
4
Download view
6(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
7(20)
Get log view

This used to retrieve the onboard error and event log.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Gets next set of logged messages (max 128 messages each time its pressed)
Get all messages in log.
If checked, auto mode is on. Auto mode triggers the Next button [1] at an interval of X seconds defined by [4].
Interval for reading via auto mode in seconds.
Enable filtering. The filtered table is shown if checked. Filtering can be used to only view certain parts of the log.
Opens the Filtering constraint dialog. Select the type of filtering here.
Clears the log table on the PC. The log in the SCS2 remains unaffected.
Saves the entire log table in a comma separated text file. Can be opened in for instance in Wordpad, Excel etc.
Cancels current operation.
Load button. Loads and displays a saved log file.
6
4
9
7
10
Get log view
7(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
8(20)
Filtering constraints
Select the type of filtering for the log view in this view.
Checked Categories, Nodes, Sub codes and Codes will appear in the filtered table.
Ex: APS_TEACH_COMMAND (of category Info) is checked but not Info under Category. The message will therefor not
appear in the filtered table.
1.
2.
3.
Message categories
Nodes that have reported messages.
Message codes for entire table
Filtering constraints
8(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
9(20)
I/O status view

This view is used to read (and force) the I/O status of the SCS2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Select node to view.

Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally press
Write [4]
Current value/current overridden value of I/O.
Write current override values to system. Only the viewed node is written to. A write for each node is required if
values are to be forced on more than one node.
Read values from SCS2. All nodes are read at once (Selected node [1] is shown).
Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [5] with interval determined by the value of: [6].
Update interval for Auto read [6].
Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:

Uncheck the corresponding I/O [2] and press Write [4]. (If a read operation is followed instead the unchecked port will be
checked by the SCS2.) All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.
4
5
I/O status view
9(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
10(20)
Misc. view
This view is used to get and set general information of the SCS2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Updates the Date and Time fields from the PC when pressed.
Set the time and date on SCS2 according to Date and Time fields.
Get current date and time from the SCS2. Displayed in Date and Time fields.
Get address key information from the node [5].
Destination of question.
Serial cable connection.
Get version information. Software version and protocol version for Boot and System program. The Boot program
version is Boot SW version and the System program version is System SW version. Dont care about the COM
versions.
Reboots the system.
Ex. Serial cable [6] is connected via COM1 to B1 and Destination [5] is set to Local node (or B1, which would be the
same). B1 is configured to have E-stop and Redundancy block activated. This will give us the answer:
Key: 5
E-Stop: YES
Redundancy: YES
Module name: B1
8
2
3
7
6
10(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
11(20)
Anybus view
The Anybus view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the fieldbus interface of the Anybus card.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Input data to SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the
value of that byte in binary format.
Output data from SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field
the value of that byte in binary format.
Reads all Input data [1] and Output data [2] from Anybus interface.
Set DeviceNet master in Run mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
Set DeviceNet master in Idle mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master.
Select node where to Read [3] data from.
1
6
7
3
Anybus view
11(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
12(20)
Spreader info view

This view is used to administrate the external EEPROM that is mounted on some spreaders.
Key = generic name of memory area of EEPROM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Shows the selected key in the Spreader info field [6]. This field can not be edited.
Shows the current value of corresponding Key [1].
Sets the Value [2] for selected Key [1].
Deletes the value for selected Key [1]. The Key [1] can not be deleted, just the value.
Updates the entire Spreader info [6] view on the PC.
Table of all Keys stored in external EEPROM.
1
2
5
7
4
3
Spreader info view
12(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
13(20)
CANopen IO view
The CANopen view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the CANopen interface.
From this view its also possible to select individual or groups of I/O and override it/them.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Retrieves the CANopen I/Oconfiguration from the system

Updates the I/O status
Updates system with overridden I/O
Dropdown box for selection of which node to show I/O from
Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally
press SetIO [3]
6. Current value/current overridden value of I/O
7. I/O port identifier
8. Cancels current operation
9. Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [2] with interval determined by the value of: [10]
10. Update interval for Auto [9]
Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden:

Uncheck the corresponding I/O [5] and press SetIO [3]. All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.
4
1
2
3
7
6
10
CANopen IO view
13(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
14(20)
Upload view
This view is for Bromma R&D personnel only. It is used to upload memory blocks from the SCS2.
Upload view
14(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
15(20)
Advanced
These six sub views are mainly intended for Brommas R&D personnel only.
CAN Tester
This view holds the functionally of the CAN Tester. To be able to use the CAN Tester the master node has to be keyed as
Test. See the SCS2 manual for information.
The main functionality is as follows:
Every node connected to the CAN network is tested.
Each connected node is tested for a pre-selected time at each selected bit rate.
When a node is tested the next node is tested at the same bit-rate and during the pre-selected time.
The test results are sent back to the CAN Tester and are displayed in the list.
1. Selects the bit-rates that are to be tested.

2. Sets the duration time of each test.
3. Shows the additional information that are used when saving the results.
4. Saves the results as a *.csv or a *.txt file.
5. Starts the test.
6. Sows status of the CAN test.
7. Closes dialog.
8. Result field showing which node that is tested.
9. Result field showing what bit-rate the test used.
10. Result field showing the minimum of retransmissions during test.
11. Result field showing the average of retransmissions during test.
12. Result field showing the maximum of retransmissions during test.
13. Result field showing the total number of messages sent during test.
14. Result field showing the total numbers of retransmissions during test.
15. Result field showing the total numbers of bus offs occurred during test.
16. Result field showing the total numbers of messages not answered during test.
15(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
Date:
hans
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
16(20)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3
4
7
5
CAN Tester view
16(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
Page:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
17(20)
Boot Loader
The Boot Loader view is used to download new boot program to connected node.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Selects the file that is to be downloaded (*.s19).

Downloads the selected file.
Progress bar showing percentage completed.
Cancels the download.
Closes dialog.
3
1
Boot Loader view
17(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
18(20)
Asserts
The asserts view holds the functionality of reading asserts from the SCS2 . It is used for detecting unexpected system
events.
Asserts view
18(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
19(20)
POM Loader
The POM Loader view is used for downloading new power monitoring programs to the SCS2 .
POM Loader view
Bluetooth
From this dialog its possible to configure and manage Bluetooth settings.
Note that the configuration possibilities only works with Bromma Conquips own Serial port adapter.
Bluetooth configurator view
19(20)
2000
Document:
Project:
Project No
BMS_med_PDF.doc
Prepared by:
hans
Date:
Version:
2004-08-12 9:15 AM C
Page:
20(20)
CANopen services
From this view its possible to perform read and write actions to CANopen slave nodes OD (Object Dictionary).
The read and write actions uses the SDO (Service Data Objects) concept of CANopen. For a more detailed description of
CANopen and its functionality its referred to more specific documentation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Page containing the read functionality

Page containing the write functionality
Selection of CANopen node to read/write from/to. The SCS2 master node has address 127.
Index in OD. (Dec.)
Sub index in OD (Dec.)
Read value/ value that is to be written
Reads/writes value
Cancels current command
Closes the dialog
Status of current command
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
CANopen services view
20(20)
2000
Spreader Control System

2:nd generation
SCS
Rev 1.0
2004-12-08
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
Version:
11
Page:
2(55)
OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................................................................................3
REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................................................3
DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS ..........................................................................................................................3
DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................3
GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................4
THE NODES ..............................................................................................................................................................5
SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................................................................6
3.1
3.2
3.3
2004-12-08 13:51
INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................................4
2.1
2.2
Date:
GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................................3
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Project No
SCS2
Manual
BOOT PROGRAM .......................................................................................................................................................6

SYSTEM PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................................6
SPREADER PROGRAM ...............................................................................................................................................6
HARDWARE OVERVIEW........................................................................................................................................7
4.1 I/O LEDS ................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2 DISPLAY ...................................................................................................................................................................7
4.2.1
Event categories.............................................................................................................................................8
4.2.2
Message format..............................................................................................................................................8
4.2.3
Priority of displayed messages ......................................................................................................................9
4.3 GROUND CONNECTION .............................................................................................................................................9
4.4 THE X1 AND X3 CONNECTORS .................................................................................................................................9
4.4.1
X1 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................10
4.4.2
X3 I/O connector..........................................................................................................................................11
4.5 THE X2 CONNECTOR ..............................................................................................................................................13
4.5.1
Main Supply .................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.2
CAN .............................................................................................................................................................13
4.5.3
Address Key .................................................................................................................................................14
4.5.4
Analogue Inputs ...........................................................................................................................................15
4.5.5
PWM Outputs...............................................................................................................................................15
4.5.6
External Spreader Memory..........................................................................................................................15
4.5.7
RS 485 and SSI.............................................................................................................................................16
4.5.8
Additional Jumper Group ............................................................................................................................16
4.6 THE X4 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................17
4.6.1
AnyBus .........................................................................................................................................................18
4.6.2
Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs ....................................................................................................................18
4.7 THE X5 CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................................19
4.7.1
RS-232..........................................................................................................................................................19
4.8 THE REDUNDANCY FUNCTION ...............................................................................................................................19
4.9 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS.......................................................................................................................................20
4.9.1
Mapping of I/O ............................................................................................................................................20
4.10
SPREADER STOP ................................................................................................................................................21
4.11
FAULT FINDING TABLE ......................................................................................................................................22
SOFTWARE TOOLS................................................................................................................................................23
5.1
5.2
5.3
OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................................................................23
ABE.......................................................................................................................................................................23
BMS ......................................................................................................................................................................23
MISCELLANEOUS ..................................................................................................................................................24
Manual
File: SCS_1
2
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
2004 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
6.1
6.2
7
Project No
SCS2
Manual
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
3(55)
DATA SHEET ...........................................................................................................................................................24

DIMENSIONS...........................................................................................................................................................25
APPENDIX A (ERROR MESSAGES) ....................................................................................................................26
General
1.1
Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the surveillance and maintenance operators of the Bromma
SCS2. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.
1.2
References
Location where to find the latest revision of this document: http://www.bromma.com/backyard/
1.3
Dictionary and abbreviations
ABE
BMS
Boot program
CAN
PWM
Spreader Program
SCS2
System Program
SSI
1.4
Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic. See separate manual for details.
Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2. See separate manual for details.
The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
Pulse Width Modulator.
The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
Synchronous Serial Interface sensor interface
Document layout
Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.

Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning.
Manual
File: SCS_1
3
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Date:
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
4(55)
Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.
SCS2 includes the following features:
A bus system able to handle 528 I/O ports (programmable input or output).
Up to four analogue inputs with 12 bit resolution.
Four PWM outputs for proportional solenoids.
One general purpose RS485 channel OR SSI channel.
Communication with the help of a standard spreader cable no screening, no twisted pair.
A system that withstands the repeated shocks and vibrations suffered by spreaders.
A system able to operate in tropical heat and arctic cold.
Choice of different field bus interfaces (ProfiBus, Interbus-S, Device Net.)
Optional duty cycle input
2.1
General
As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:
Crane Node1
A device directly interfacing with the cranes control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.
Crane-Spreader Communications Link
A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane

control system and the spreader.
Spreader Node
A device that interfaces directly with the spreaders sensors, supports discrete
signals, and acts as the Master node.
Sensors and Switches
Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.
The system is divided into several hardware units called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the
1
For details regarding separate dedicated crane fieldbus gateway, see separate manual
Manual
File: SCS_1
4
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
5(55)
number of I/O needed. The nodes are all equals, both in software as well as in hardware. This reduces spare parts and
enables easy-to-change procedures.
The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:
0 is the master called B1
1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.
Crane
I/O
...
Slave A1
Slave A4
CAN network (BCAN)
B1 Master
I/O
B2 Slave
...
SCS
B8 Slave
Spreader
Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.
2.2
The Nodes
The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master, but can also
have distributed functions such as regulators.
Manual
File: SCS_1
5
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Date:
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
6(55)
Software
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.
3.1
Boot Program
When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.
The Boot program is responsible for
Initialising hardware
Checking that all the system Programs match.
Checking that the emergency stop and redundancy settings are correct
Performing a program downloads.
3.2
System program
After the Boot program is finished, the System program will run, until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Executing the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC via the com-port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Handling in the event log
Reading and writing I/O
3.3
Spreader Program
The Spreader Program is the program logic that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see chapter 5.2 for
a brief description.
Manual
File: SCS_1
6
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
Project No
SCS2
Manual
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
7(55)
Hardware Overview
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node. The different parts are explained in the following chapter.
X1- I/O
Connector
4.1
X2- I/O, bus

& supply
Connector
X3- I/O
Connector
I/O LED
1-48
Bus/AI
(X4)
RS232
(X5)
Display &
Power
LEDS
I/O LEDs
The I/O LEDs indicate the current status of the corresponding I/O module. The LED is powered from the secondary (5V)
of the module.
4.2
Display
The display shows three pages of information where each page has a maximum of 8 characters. Each page is shown for 1
second. The pages show the following:
Node ID and System program version. Format: <Node ID><Version>.
Elapsed time running since power on. Format: DDD HHMM where DDD is the number of days, HH the number of hours
and MM the number of minutes.
Message page. The message page shows numeric information only, which has to be translated into comprehensive plain
text manually. The meaning of this page is explained in the rest of this section.
There are also four red LEDs in the bottom of the display window indicating the supply voltage level. Four different
levels are indicated and the ideal voltage is when all LEDs are lit.
LED1 11V, FAIL
LED2 14V, WARNING 2
LED3 17V, WARNING
LED4 21V, OK
It is not recommended to run the system below the OK level though it still seems to work fine. Attached devices may
malfunction at lower voltages thus making the system unreliable. The green LED is the power on indicator.
Manual
File: SCS_1
7
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Date:
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
8(55)
4.2.1
Event categories
There are three categories of information displayed on the event page: information, warning and error.
Type
Error
Prefix
E
Example
E102
Note
Any error message would shut down the system. All outputs are
turned off and the program is halted. Error messages will begin with
an E.
Warning
W60
Warning shows information about the system status that is of high

importance. The system keeps on running. Warning messages will
begin with a W.
Information
I59
Information shows progress in the system. Examples of information

that could qualify to be displayed as information:
Program load status (how many percent are completed), version
verification info, BMS connected, etc. Informational messages will
begin with an I.
Information
4.2.2
Message format
The display can show 8 characters. These are used in the following format:
LTTTSSSS
L = Level type
TTT = Message type
SSSS = Sub type
Example:
E102 => Error in initialising the hardware
W61 1 => Warning indicating that a twistlock is indicating locked and unlocked. The sub code indicates that it is corner 1.
I59 => Information that the system has started.
Level type
The level type can be one of the following: I = Information, W = Warning, E = Error
Message type
The message type represents the cause of the message. Examples of message types are System started, Wrong system
version and I/O error.
All these types are described in appendix A.
Sub type
The sub type is used to specify more detailed information about the message type. The sub types have different meanings
for all message types. For example does sub type 14 together with message type 47 mean I/O error on digital port 14
instead of just I/O error.
These sub types are described in appendix A.
Manual
File: SCS_1
8
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
9(55)
4.2.3
Priority of displayed messages
Only the latest event is displayed at a time. When the display shows a warning and an event occurs which would show
information, the warning has higher priority and is thereby left on the display. The same relationship goes for errorinformation and error-warning.
Priority in descending order:
Error
Warning
Information
Note that warnings are cleared from the display after at least 10 messages of informational type have passed and the
warning message is older than 15 minutes. Error messages are cleared by resetting the system.
4.3
Ground connection
The node chassis must be properly connected to protective earth. A grounding bolt is placed on the right hand side of the
node for this purpose.
4.4
The X1 and X3 connectors
There are 48 digital ports on a node. Each port can be configured as either input or output via software. The ports 1 to 44
are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. Each group has a Common junction. See the connector part for more
detailed information. Ports 45 to 48 are single I/O.
Manual
File: SCS_1
9
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
4.4.1
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Date:
Version:
2004-12-08 13:51
11
Page:
10(55)
X1 I/O connector

Description
Name
I/O-1
General purpose input or output / Unlocked_0
I/O-2
I/O-3
I/O-4
Common/Supply 1 Common junction for I/O-1 to I/O-4
X1 pin number
31
41
43
42
44
I/O-5
I/O-6
I/O-7
I/O-8
Common/Supply 2
General purpose input or output / Locked_0

3
2
11
1
21
I/O-9
I/O-10
I/O-11
I/O-12
Common/Supply 3

26
16
6
7
8
I/O-13
I/O-14
I/O-15
I/O-16
Common/Supply 4

4
5
25
15
35
I/O-17
I/O-18
I/O-19
I/O-20
Common/Supply 5
General purpose input or output / Landed_left_0

General purpose input or output / Landed_left_1
General purpose input or output / Landed_right_0
General purpose input or output / Landed_right_1
10
20
30
40
9
I/O-212
I/O-22
I/O-23
I/O-24
Common/Supply 6
General purpose input or output / Lock_left

General purpose input or output / Lock_right
General purpose input or output / Unlock_left
General purpose input or output / Unlock_right
46
47
49
48
50
Redundancy remark.
I/O signals 21 24 are affected by the redundancy safety functionality. See chapter 4.8
Manual
File: SCS_1
10
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
Version:
2004-12-08 13:51
11
Page:
11(55)
To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically
as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding
switches/valves with common potential.
X1 - Pin number
12
13
14
22
23
24
32
33
34
45
4.4.2
Link configuration X1 - Pin number

17
18
19
27
28
29
37
39
38
36
Link configuration
X3 I/O connector

Name
I/O-25
I/O-26
I/O-27
I/O-28
Common/Supply 7
Description
X3 pin number
21
31
41
42
11
I/O-29
I/O-30
I/O-31
I/O-32
Common/Supply 8

24
35
44
45
43
I/O-33
I/O-34
I/O-35
I/O-36
Common/Supply 9

5
4
3
2
1
I/O-37
I/O-38
I/O-39
I/O-40

6
16
25
26
Manual
File: SCS_1
11
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
Version:
2004-12-08 13:51
11
Name
Description
Common/Supply 10 Common junction for I/O-37 to I/O-40
X3 pin number
15
I/O-41
I/O-42
I/O-43
I/O-44
Common/Supply 11
49
48
47
46
36

I/O-45
7
8
I/O-46
9
10
I/O-47
50
40
I/O-48
30
20
Page:
12(55)
X3 - Pin number
12
13
14
22
23
32
33
34
Manual
File: SCS_1
Link configuration X3 - Pin number

17
18
19
27
28
29
37
38
39
12
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Link configuration
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
4.5
Project No
SCS2
Manual
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
13(55)
The X2 connector
The X2 connector has a jumper group to be used for supply voltage to the different analogue sensors.
4.5.1
Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC power supply for the node. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single
pins. DC voltage can be applied either way.
Name
24INA
24INA
24INB
24INB
Pin number in connector

X2/42
X2/43
X2/45
X2/44
4.5.2
CAN
The two CAN nets are placed in the X2 connector. The first net use Bromma CAN (BCAN) voltage levels and the second
net use standard CAN voltage levels. The standard CAN net has to be terminated with external resistors.
Name
CAN High 1
CAN Low 1
CAN High 2 / Reserved3
CAN Low 2 / Reserved3
CAN GND 2/ Reserved3

X2/30
X2/40
X2/50
X2/20
X2/48
CAN channel is std CAN for CAN-Open installations
Manual
File: SCS_1
13
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
14(55)
4.5.3
Address Key
All nodes must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins ID0 ID4 where pins being connected to the ground
pin corresponds to zeroes and pins left unconnected are considered ones.
Name
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
ID0
Ground

X2/49
X2/39
X2/29
X2/19
X2/9
X2/10
Configuration
Since all nodes are the same in reference to the software as well as hardware you have to configure them to carry different
roles. Setting the address key configures the role of the node. The address key has two other functions as well, enabling
Spreader stop and enabling redundancy block. These functions are described in chapters 4.10 and 4.8.
The address key setting is described in the following table:
Key input
Node
name
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
1001111110
11111
Test
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B1
B1
B2
B2
B2
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Not
Used
Test
Spreader
stop
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Redundancy block and Pins to be linked together in

override of landing
X2 connector
pins
10,9,19,29,39,49
No
10,19,29,39,49
No
10,9,29,39,49
No
10,29,39,49
No
10,9,19,39,49
Yes
10,19,39,49
No
10,9,39,49
Yes
10,39,49
No
10,9,19,29,49
Yes
10,19,29,49
No
10,9,29,49
Yes
10,29,49
No
10,9,19,49
No
10,19,49
No
10,9,49
No
10,49
No
10,9,19,29,39
No
10,19,29,39
No
10,9,29,39
Node number identifier

when viewing Display and
Log
8
9
10
11
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
None
Example
Here are three examples of how to set the address key:
A node with id B1 without redundancy block or emergency stop has the address key 01000.
A node with id B2 with both redundancy block and emergency stop has the address key 01001.
A node with id A2 (cannot have redundancy block or emergency stop enabled) has the address key 00010.
Manual
File: SCS_1
14
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
15(55)
4.5.4
Analogue Inputs
There are two analogue inputs on each node via the X2 connector (the other two are via the X4 connector). Each signal
has its own 10V-reference voltage output, ground reference and sensor signal that should be connected to the sensor
device.
Name
Analogue in 1
10Vref 1
Signal ground 1

X2/18
X2/28
X2/8
Analogue in 2
10Vref 2
Signal ground 2
X2/17
X2/27
X2/7
4.5.5
PWM Outputs
There are four PWM outputs for driving external loads, for example proportional hydraulic valves. Each output has two
connections, one in and one out. The load should be connected between these, since it is a current loop.
Name
PWM out 1
PWM in 1

X2/3
X2/4
PWM out 2
PWM in 2
X2/2
X2/1
PWM out 3
PWM in 3
X2/21
X2/11
PWM out 4
PWM in 4
X2/31
X2/41
4.5.6
External Spreader Memory
An external EEPROM memory can be mounted on the spreader for spreader id and/or user defined purpose. The memory
is connected as below.
Name
10V supply
Serial data
Serial clock
Signal ground
Manual
File: SCS_1

X2/36
X2/16
X2/26
X2/6
Cable
Red
Blue
Green
Black
15
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
16(55)
4.5.7
RS 485 and SSI
The RS 485 connection can be used for external sensors or user defined purpose. The SSI connection can be used with
external sensors with up to 25 bits data length. The hardware and the pins in connector X2 are shared between RS 485
and SSI. Therefore it is only possible to use one of these connections at a time.
When used as a RS 485 the following pins are used:
Name
Channel A
X2/38
Channel B
X2/37
When used as SSI the following pins are used:
Name
Clock+
X2/38
ClockX2/37
Data+
X2/15
DataX2/25
4.5.8
Additional Jumper Group
X2 - Pin number
22
23
32
33
34
Manual
File: SCS_1
Link configuration
16
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
4.6
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Date:
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
17(55)
The X4 Connector
The X4 connector can be configured for field bus operation or one of three alternative functions. The alternatives are a RS
232 serial port, two additional analogue inputs or a duty cycle input. The function is selected by connecting different pin
headers to connector CN103. To find these pin headers the SCS2 node must be opened. The figure below shows the
relative placement of the pin headers. In each pin header the pins are number 1 to 5 or 1 to 10. In the figure a pin with a
circle to the left is number one in that header.
Field bus operation is selected by connecting the field bus connector on the Anybus card with pin header CN103. The RS
232 serial port is selected by connecting CN100 and CN103. The two additional analogue inputs are selected by
connecting CN105 and CN103. Finally the duty cycle input is selected by connecting CN104 with CN103.
Front view of connectors inside node.
Manual
File: SCS_1
17
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
18(55)
4.6.1
AnyBus
The AnyBus connector is used to interface any of the fieldbus types used apart from BCAN.
Name
A-Line
B-Line
GND-BUS

X4/2
X4/1
X4/3
4.6.2
Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs
These two analogue inputs use the same ground and 10 V reference voltages as the two analogue inputs in connector X2.
The input range is either 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA. The 0 to 20 mA range is selected for channel 1 by jumpering pin
number 1 and 2 in CN106 and for channel 2 by jumering pin number 4 and 5 in CN106. If no jumpers are added on
CN106 the voltage range, 0 to 10 V range is selected as default. In the 0 to 20 mA range a 500 Ohm resistor is used
internally and therefore the current being measured must be capable of driving 20 mA at 10 V to utilise the full 0 to 20
mA range.
Name
GND
GND
Analogue Input 1
Analogue Reference 10 V
Analogue Input 2
Manual
File: SCS_1

X5/1
X5/2
X5/5
X5/3
X5/4
18
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
4.7
Project No
SCS2
Manual
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
19(55)
The X5 Connector
4.7.1
RS-232
The RS-232 connector, called BMS port, is located to the right of the node and is used only for this purpose.
Name
TxD
RxD
RTS
CTS
GND

X5/1
X5/2
X5/5
X5/3
X5/4
4.8
The Redundancy Function
For safety reasons the hardware is designed to override the operator commands in some occasions. This is to prevent the
operator from making wrong commands by accident when the spreader is not landed, prohibiting dangerous results.
A
E
The commands either from a remote node on the network or the local node itself.
The CPU and the system software as well as the application specific software (Spreader program).
The redundancy block of hardware static logic. The block has two functions, to make sure the twistlocks are energised
correctly at boot and to prevent the software from changing between lock and unlock when not landed during operation.
At boot the redundancy block checks the sensor status and determines if the twistlock valves are to be energised and in
what direction. After a correct landing and a transition between lock/unlock the redundancy block goes passive only
preventing the software to change between lock and unlock unless the Spreader is properly landed. In this state the
redundancy can be viewed as two relay contacts, where only one contact is closed at a time permitting the twistlock
outputs. The only way of overriding the logic of the redundancy block is to energise a specific I/O (landed override) on
that particular node.
The outputs to the lock/unlock valves
The sensor signals from landed, locked and unlocked.
To enable the redundancy the address key on B1 or B2 is used, this then automatically means you have to use input 48 as
Landed override to be able to override the hardware logic. The landed override signal sets the spreader in landed mode
and thereby temporarily disables the redundancy block.
Manual
File: SCS_1
19
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
4.9
Project No
SCS2
Manual
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
20(55)
Field bus Connections.
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This
card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the AnyBus the
crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be used as a Master bus for
an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card translates a number of
different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different
buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please
view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.
4.9.1
Mapping of I/O
OUT
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
outputs
IN
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
inputs
Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display; hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2-3 (WORD)
Byte 4-5 (WORD)
Byte 6-7 (WORD)
Manual
File: SCS_1

=> Diagnostic code
20
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
21(55)

way.
Byte 8
=> Node ID
Byte 9-10
Byte 11-16
Byte 17-18
=> sequential counter
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
4.10 Spreader Stop

A Spreader stop function can be used in the system.
This is performed by enabling Spreader stop using the address key on B1 or B2 and connecting the signal from the
spreader stop button to digital port 47 on the corresponding node (B1 or B2).
The spreader stop configuration must correspond to the spreader stop setting in the spreader program. This means that if
and only if the spreader stop on a node is enabled, digital port 47 must be connected to the Spreader Stop component in
the spreader program.
Manual
File: SCS_1
21
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
22(55)
4.11 Fault Finding table

Symptom
What to do
Comment
Power Supply
Node wont start. No text appears in
the display after power-on.
Measure the main supply. The voltage

should exceed 17V AC or DC.
The green and all red LEDs in the

display should be lit.
Probe TxD and RxD lines with

oscilloscope while trying to
communicate.
Data lines should show square waves

between 10V to +10V relative to
GND pin.
RS-232
BMS system can not communicate
with the node.
CAN
The node can not communicate with
the other nodes.
Digital Ports
Input signal fault
Output signal fault
Node ID
The node stops at start-up with Node
Id displayed.
Analogue Inports
Analogue input signal appears to be
faulty.
PWM Outports
PWM output appears to be faulty.
Manual
File: SCS_1
Probe bus lines with oscilloscope.

CAN high should show square waves
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.
Check if LED indicator on I/O module

responds to sensor signal.
Check the Common connection for
correct supply.
Check if LED indicator on I/O module
responds to command.
Check the load for proper connection
and grounding.
Check for broken fuse on the I/O
module.
Check the Common connection for
correct supply.
The LED should be lit when current

flows through the module.
Measure the voltage of all ID pins. 5V

represent ones and 0V represents
zeroes. The measures should indicate
the expected id.
This can indicate that the node has

wrong id strapped telling the node to
participate in the system with wrong
role.
Check the reference voltage relative to

the GND.
Check if the node chassis is properly
grounded to the spreader.
There should be exactly 10V

difference between them.
This is very important in an AC driven
system.
The LED should be lit when the circuit

is closed.
The load should be connected between
the modules out pin and ground.
The supply voltage depends on the

type of load. 220V,110V,24V or other.
Check the load for errors.

Try another load.
22
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Date:
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
23(55)
Software tools
5.1
Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.
5.2
ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.
5.3
BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.
Manual
File: SCS_1
23
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Date:
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
24(55)
Miscellaneous
6.1
Data sheet
Parameter
Note
Min
Max
Unit
Operating voltage
Current consumption
Power monitoring
Pin X2 42-44
Depending on number and type of I/O modules
Level and quality measurement of voltage.
Indicated via LEDs. (faults stored in log)
Operating temperature
Internal temperature monitoring
IP67
In accordance with 89/336/EEC:
17
300
40
800
V AC/DC
mA
-40
+85
0
0
2,5
10
A
V
12
300
230
kHz
V AC/DC
Temperature
EMC conformity
Controller
Memory
Time
PWM current output
Analogue inputs
SSI
I/O 48 programmable
Scan time
Serial interfaces
Diagnostics
FB programming
Manual
File: SCS_1
EN 50081-2: 1993
EN 50082-2: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 6: 1996
EN 61000-4-8:1993
ENV 50204: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 4: 1995
EN 61000- 4- 2: 1995
32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz

Program 1.4Mb
Log/NVRAM 128kb
External EEPROM 256byte
1*realtime clock
4*Current controlled. Short circuit protected.
12 bit resolution voltage/current
10V reference voltage output
serial
Voltage depending on type of module used.
Galvanic isolation. LED indication.
SC/OL protected 3A.
System scan time
Node scan time
BCAN Bromma CAN based bus
RS485 Asynchronous for sensors etc.
RS232 For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
8 character display for messages & information
Power level via LEDs
Event and error log
Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions
24
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
50
5
ms
ms
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
6.2
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Date:
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
25(55)
Dimensions
Figure 1 All dimensions in mm
Manual
File: SCS_1
25
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
Project No
SCS2
Manual
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
26(55)
Appendix A (Error messages)
The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). It is the same information in both interfaces and is explained in this appendix in the table below.
Nu level
m.l
cod
e
0
1
2
Description of code
Description of sub code Consequence
WARNING Failed reading temperature

spare 0
Hints
.
.
spare 1
spare 2
spare 3
Two different PCs' trying to

download to the system
Id of one of the node

connected to the PC
spare 4
spare 5
spare 6
10
spare 7
11
spare 8
12 ERROR
Program memory failure, HW

fault
System is brought into failsafe mode.
13 ERROR
No response from slave when

initialising system
System is brought into

failsafe mode.
14 ERROR
Boot sequence failed

failsafe mode.
15
spare 9
16
spare 10
17
spare 11
18
spare 12
19
spare 13
20 ERROR
Downloading error, connection .

broken
21
spare 14
22 ERROR
Memory collides when

downloading program
23
spare 15
ERROR
Manual
File: SCS_1
26
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

failsafe mode.
Ensure that only

one PC is
downloading
Ensure that all

slave are
powered up &
correctly
addressed
Restart system

failsafe mode.
reload program

failsafe mode.
recompile and
download
program again
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
27(55)
24
spare 16
25
spare 17
26
spare 18
27
spare 19
28 WARNING No data in program/system

memory
29
spare 20
30 WARNING Checksum of memory corrupt
31 ERROR
HW fault on memory
32
spare 21
33
spare 22
34 ERROR
System init. Display. This error The error codes during the system boot phase that have caused the
code accumalates and displays system to go into failsafe mode
the errors ocurred during the
system boot, since no reporting
is done until the system has
started.
35 ERROR
System failed in reading

.
spreader program from memory

failsafe mode.
reload and
restart
36 ERROR
No spreader program residing in .

memory

failsafe mode.
download
program
37 ERROR
System failed to run spreader

program

failsafe mode.
reload proram
38 ERROR
Spreader program object

instances failed

failsafe mode.
39 ERROR

instances failed

failsafe mode.
40 ERROR

instances failed

failsafe mode.
41 ERROR

instances failed

failsafe mode.
42 ERROR

instances failed

failsafe mode.
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader.
If problems
persist contact
Bromma
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Manual
File: SCS_1
System cannot start
Contact Bromma

failsafe mode.
Contact Bromma
if problem
persists
27
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
43 ERROR
2004-12-08 13:51

instances failed
44 WARNING I/O message lost

45 ERROR
Memory failure
.
.
46
47
spare 23
spare 24
.
.
48
spare 25
49
spare 26
50 ERROR
Failed to configure I/O on node The node ID which has

generated the error
The node ID which has
Duplicate answers on I/O
generated the error
configuration from the same
node when initialising system
51 ERROR
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Version:
11
Page:

failsafe mode.
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma

failsafe mode.
Restart system.
If problems
persist contact
Bromma

failsafe mode.
failsafe mode.
restart
restart
52 ERROR
System initialising error when

configuring nodes I/O
The node ID which has System is brought into

generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart
53 ERROR


generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart
54
spare 27
55 ERROR


generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart
56 ERROR
No answer when master

.
requesting configuration
information during intitialisation

failsafe mode.
57 ERROR

.

failsafe mode.
58 ERROR

.

failsafe mode.
59 INFO
System started
check
connections
between nodes.
Restart
check
connections
between nodes.
Restart
check
connections
between nodes.
Restart
60 WARNING TWL - No twistlock sensor

.
inputs active during system start
Manual
File: SCS_1
28(55)
28
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Message stored in log and check wiring,

displayed on Spreader
sensors and
connectors or
mechanical
reasons
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Date:
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
29(55)
61 WARNING TWL - One twistlock indicating ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
both locked and unlocked
which generated the
damaged sensors
warning
and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
62 WARNING TWL - timeout locking. Locked ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
signal has not been received
which generated the
valves and/or
after output to valve
warning
wiring or
mechanical
reasons
ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for
63 WARNING TWL - Locked sensor lost
which generated the
during operation. Sensor lost
damaged sensors
without command/output when warning
and sensor
twistlocks are all locked
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor,
64 WARNING TWL - timeout unlocking.
which generated the
Unlocked signal has not been
valves and/or
warning
received after output to valve
wiring or
mechanical
reasons
65 WARNING TWL - Unocked sensor lost
which generated the
during operation. Sensor lost
damaged sensors
without command/output when warning
and sensor
twistlocks are all unlocked
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
66 WARNING TWL - all landed sensors not
which generated the
received after first landed and
damaged sensors
warning
timeout.
and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
67 WARNING TWL - landed sensor not
released when the other sensors which generated the
damaged sensors
not active and a timer has timed warning
and sensor
out
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
68 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. No .
Stops the telescope and check for
valid sensor found within
displays/stores message damaged sensors
and sensor
timeout limit after output has
been activated
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
69 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type.
ID no. of the sensor
Stops the telescope and check for
Wrong sensor in telescoping
missing which
displays/stores message damaged sensors
sequence reached
and sensor
generated the warning
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
Manual
File: SCS_1
29
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
70 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID no. of the lost

position sensor is lost without an sensor
output.
Version:
11
Page:
30(55)
Message stored in log and displayed on

Spreader
71 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. Two ID no.s. of the sensors Message stored in log and check for
different position sensors
damaged sensors
indicating simultaneously
and sensor
adjustment or
mechanical
reasons
72 ERROR
Duplicate answers from one
restart (check
node during boot verification
generated the error
failsafe mode.
address keying)
73 ERROR
Wrong boot version in a node

generated the error
failsafe mode.
contact Bromma
74 ERROR

requesting boot version.

generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart
75
76
77
78
spare 28
spare 29
spare 30
spare 31
79
spare 32
80 ERROR
Wrong node answered request

from master to check if pc was
connected
No answer after master request
to check PC port (RS232)

generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart

generated the error
failsafe mode.
restart, check
connections
82 ERROR
Unable to download program

failsafe mode.
retry
83 ERROR
Unable to download program

(checksum failure)

failsafe mode.
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
84 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time

couldn't be read
85 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time

couldn't be set
81 ERROR
86 INFO
87 INFO
88 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
minimum system CPU cycle

time in ms
time. Periodically reported every
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
maximum system CPU cycle
time in ms
time. Periodically reported every
half hour. The counter is reset
after reporting.
average system CPU cycle time. time in ms
Periodically reported every half
hour. The counter is reset after
30
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader

Spreader

Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
31(55)
reporting.
89
spare 33
90 INFO
The number of the

counter
91
92
The number of control loops

exceeding 100ms for th last half
hour. The counter is reset after
reporting
spare 34
spare 35
93
spare 36
94 ERROR
No operative system in Node
95 ERROR
Duplicate answer on
determining Spreader stop set up generated the error
failsafe mode.
check adress key
96 ERROR
No answer on Master request for .

"Spreader stop" configuration

failsafe mode.
check adress key
97 INFO
Spreader stop has been

activated/deactivated
0= activated
1=deactivated

Spreader
98
spare 37
99
spare 38
100 ERROR
Spreader program fault

failsafe mode.
System shutdown
contact Bromma

failsafe mode.
check
battery/restart/co
ntact Bromma

Spreader
.
.
Systems fails to start
contact Bromma
recompile and
reload spreader
program
The first message type Message stored in log and displayed on
in the buffer
Spreader
101 WARNING CAN message buffer is full
102 ERROR
System failed to initialise HW
103
spare 39
104
spare 40
105 ERROR
Onboard NV RAM failed

memory test
106
spare 41
107 WARNING 10V reference voltage too low
Actual voltage *10
Message stored in log and check supplies

108 WARNING 12V internal supply too low
Actual voltage *10

Manual
File: SCS_1
31
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
109 ERROR
Battery voltage too low
110 ERROR
The System failed to lock th I/O .

on a node during system init.
111
spare 42
112
spare 43
113
114 INFO
spare 44
System is shutting down
.
.
115 INFO
116
System shutdown has been

completed
spare 45
117
spare 46
118 INFO
120
Landed override has been

activated
Landed override has been
deactivated
spare 47
121
spare 48
122
spare 49
123
spare 50
124
spare 51
125
spare 52
126
spare 53
127
spare 54
128
spare 55
129 ERROR
Spreader program fault or load

file has been korrupted
130 ERROR
131 ERROR
119 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Actual voltage *10
Version:
11
Page:
32(55)
Message stored in log and check battery

failsafe mode.
restart

failsafe mode.


failsafe mode.


failsafe mode.
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
.
.
32
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
132
spare 56
133
spare 57
134
spare 58
135
spare 59
136 ERROR

137
spare 60
138
spare 61
139
spare 62
Version:
11

failsafe mode.
Page:
33(55)
check and
recompile
spreader
program.
Reload. /contact
Bromma
140 WARNING Unknown CAN message

received
The ID type of the

message

Spreader
141 INFO
CAN messages missed.

Cyclically reported.
The count of the

missed messages

Spreader
142 ERROR
Two nodes within the system

have the same ID/adress
The ID which is
duplicate

failsafe mode.
143 WARNING 10V reference voltage is too

high
Voltage * 10
check and
correct the
adress key
144 WARNING 12V internal voltage is too high Voltage * 10

145 WARNING Battery voltage is too high

Voltage * 10
146 WARNING User defined Warning. The

.
user/programmer defines what
this fault should indicate within
the application program.
Message stored in log and Check specific

project.

.

project.
Manual
File: SCS_1
33
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
34(55)
.

project.

.

project.

.

project.

.

project.
.

project.
.

project.
.

project.

.

project.
156
spare 63
157
spare 64
158
spare 65
159
spare 66
160
spare 67
161 WARNING CAN error
Manual
File: SCS_1
34
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
35(55)
162 WARNING RS232 error

Spreader
163 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor

supply voltage. Warning 1 =
Voltage < 21V

164 ERROR
check supplies
System is taken down
into idle mode. Ie if the
system voltage comes up
again it wakes otherwise
is prepared to shut down

.
Power monitor P2 = internal
logic supply voltage. ERROR =
Voltage below permissive
voltage of system.
check supplies
167 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM

Voltage < 21V

168 ERROR
check supplies
Power monitor P1 = sensor

supply voltage. ERROR =
voltage of system.
165 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal

Voltage < 21V
166 ERROR
Power monitor P3 = PWM

supply voltage. ERROR =
voltage of system.
169 WARNING System failed to read/write to a ID of port:

I/O port
Digital=0+port_no,
Analogue=100+port_n
o, PWM=200+port_no,
encoder=300+port_no.
170
spare 68
171
spare 69
172
spare 70
173
spare 71
Manual
File: SCS_1
35
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
36(55)
174 ERROR
No answer when on general

information request between
nodes.

Spreader
175 INFO
TWL - twistlock lock command .

received

Spreader
176 INFO
TWL - twistlock unlock

command received

Spreader
177 INFO
TWL - twistlock has been

locked

Spreader
178 INFO
TWL - twistlock has been

unlocked

Spreader
179 INFO
TELESCOPE - prox. type.


Spreader
180 INFO


Spreader
181 INFO

Command to go to a speceific
position has been received
The ID of the position

requested

Spreader
182 INFO
TELESCOPE - prox. type. The

desired position has been
reached

requested

Spreader
183 WARNING TELESCOPE - automatic type. 0 = Desired position

The telescope hasn't reached its' not reached within time
position within time limit
limit.
1 = telescope has not
moved more than 1 cm
during 3 seconds.
The telescopic motion is

stopped until a new
command is given.
Message stored in log and
184 INFO
TELESCOPE - automatic type. .

expand command received

Spreader
185 INFO


Spreader
Manual
File: SCS_1
36
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
check sensor,
pressure,mechan
ics. If necessary
calibrate system.
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
37(55)
186 INFO
TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position

Command to go to a specific
requested
position received

Spreader
187 INFO
TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position

The desired position reached
requested

Spreader
188 INFO
The year has been set
current value (year)

Spreader
189 INFO
The month has been set
current value (month)

Spreader
190 INFO
The day/date has been set
current value (date)

Spreader
191 INFO
The time of day (hour) has been current value (hour)

set

Spreader
192 WARNING Nocontact with the master for

10s
The ID of the node

which doesn't have
contact
Message stored in log and check

connections
193 ERROR
Message reported during boot.

Unknown role
Information request (system
boot functionality)
restart (check
address keying)
Spreader
195 INFO
Download request active

(system boot functionality)

Spreader
196 INFO
Information request received


Spreader
197 INFO
set time request received


Spreader
198 INFO
Boot version request received.


Spreader
199
spare 72
194 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
37
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
38(55)
200 INFO
Download flag request received. .

201
spare 73
202
spare 74
203
spare 75
204
spare 76
205 INFO
Check flash memory request

received. (system boot
functionality)

Spreader
206 INFO
Restart node request received.


Spreader
207 INFO
System start init. (system boot

functionality)

Spreader
208 INFO
System look for downloadflag.


Spreader
209 INFO
Send datablock request. (system .

boot functionality)

Spreader
210 INFO
Received datablock. (system

boot functionality)

Spreader
211 INFO
Download in progress
percentage of
downloaded data
progress shown on Spreader display
212 INFO
copy serial information to flash .

memory
213
spare 77
214
spare 78
215 ERROR
No answer when waiting for

present nodes response
216 INFO
Inforamtion on present nodes

has been received

Spreader
217 ERROR
Download timeout

failsafe mode.
218
spare 79
Manual
File: SCS_1
38
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader

Spreader
reload
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
219 ERROR
220 ERROR
221 ERROR
222 ERROR
223 ERROR
224 ERROR
225 ERROR
226 ERROR
227
Project No
SCS2
Manual
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
39(55)
No answers or inconsistent
answers from system members
during boot
The size of received data is to
large. Boot message
during boot
during boot
during boot
during boot
during boot
during boot
spare 80
.
during boot
Spreader error and event log has .
been cleared
230 ERROR
Failed to set up spreader

program correctly
destination of error

failsafe mode.
231 ERROR
Spreader program download

error
232 ERROR
Spreader program download

error
233 INFO
Power monitor P1 = sensor

supply voltage. OK
234 INFO
Power monitor P2 = internal

supply voltage. OK
228 ERROR
229 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
39
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
failsafe mode.
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Check spreader
failsafe mode.
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
Spreader
Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
40(55)
235 INFO
Power monitor P3 = PWM

supply voltage. OK

Spreader
236 INFO
Reboot (restart) request sent

.
from master to slaves. Happens
when slaves are powered on
before master at system start
System has been taken down to .
idle mode. Ie waiting to wake
up.

Spreader
237 INFO

Spreader
238
Spare 81
239 INFO
System failed to cancel

shutdown process

Spreader
240 INFO
No answer when attempting to

cancel shutdown process

Spreader
241 INFO
System received timeout when

attempting to cancel shutdown
process

Spreader
242 INFO
System shutdown aborted

Spreader
243
spare 82
244 INFO
TWL - The spreader has been

landed

Spreader
245 INFO
TWL - The Spreader has been

totally lifted (not landed)

Spreader
246 INFO
FLIPPER - flipper up command .

received

Spreader
247 INFO
FLIPPER - flipper down

command received

Spreader
AI can start to flicker. Message stored in

log and displayed on Spreader
248 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor

Voltage < 17V
Manual
File: SCS_1
40
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
41(55)
249 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal

Voltage <17V

250 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM

Voltage < 17V

251 ERROR
System failed to initialise fielbus .

interface
252 ERROR
Duplicate answers when setting .

up fieldbus interface
253 ERROR
No answer when configuring

fieldbus interface
254 WARNING System failed in locking

fieldbus interface
255 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have

failed to get to their upper
ID of the twin box

failing

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
256 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed .

to reach its' upper position
within time limit

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
257 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed .

to reach its' upper position
within time limit

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
258 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes left

timed out when expanding to
their attach position. Failed to
reach switch within time limit
check
Twin down sequence
stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
Spreaer to twin up
position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader
259 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes right

timed out when expanding to
their attach position. Failed to
reach switch within time limit
Twin down sequence

check
stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha
Spreaer to twin up
nics/sensors
position. Message stored
in log and displayed on
Spreader
260 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed .

to reach its' lower position
(connect) within time limit

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
Manual
File: SCS_1
41
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
42(55)
261 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed .

to reach its' lower position
(connect) within time limit

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
262 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have

failed to get to their lower
ID of the twin box

failing

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
263 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor lost

unexpectedly. (not due to
output)
ID of the twin box

failing

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
264 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor

received when twinboxes are
down
ID of the twin box

failing

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
265 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook down

sensor lost unexpectedly.

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
266 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook down

sensor lost unexpectedly.

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
267 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook up sensor .

lost unexpectedly.

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
268 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook up sensor .

lost unexpectedly.

solenoids/mecha
nics/sensors
269 ERROR
System failed to init. RS485
Node ID

failsafe mode.
restart / contact
Bromma
270 ERROR
Duplicate answers in system

when setting up RS485
Node ID

failsafe mode.
restart / contact
Bromma
271 ERROR
System timed out when trying to .

configure RS485

failsafe mode.
restart / contact
Bromma
272 INFO

Teach in command received

Spreader
273 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - expand
command received

Spreader
274 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - retract
command received

Spreader
Manual
File: SCS_1
42
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
43(55)
275 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - left
console reached zero gap
position

Spreader
276 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - right
console reached zero gap
position

Spreader
277 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs
expand in motion

Spreader
278 INFO
TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs
retract in motion

Spreader
279 WARNING TWINTELESCOPE - hasn't

reached an endstop when in
motion within time limit
motion is stopped.
check
Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves
280
spare 83
281 INFO
TWINMPS - teaching a predefined position

teached

Spreader
282 INFO
TWINMPS - command to go to The ID of the position

a pre-defined position has been requested
received

Spreader
283 INFO
TWINMPS - A command to
store a new value for a log
position has been received
284 INFO
TWINMPS - A command to
return to a log position has been requested
received

Spreader
Spreader
285 WARNING TWINMPS - the twinlegs

haven't reached their requested
Motion is stopped.
check
Message stored in log and pressure/mechan
ics(lubrication)/s
ensor/valves
286 INFO
TWIN195 - twin up command

has been received

Spreader
287 INFO
TWIN195 - twin down

command has been received

Spreader
Manual
File: SCS_1
43
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
Page:
11
44(55)
288 INFO
TWIN195 - twin boxes have

reached their upper position

Spreader
289 INFO
TWIN195 - twin boxes have

reached their lower position

Spreader
290 INFO
TTDS - override request

received

Spreader
291 INFO
TTDS - override request ended

Spreader
292 WARNING Buffer full transferring serial

port info over CAN bus

Spreader
293 WARNING No answer when transferring

serial port info over Can bus

Spreader
294 ERROR
Failed to communicate with

RS485
System is brought
into failsafe mode.
295
spare 84
296
spare 85
297
spare 86
298 ERROR
Failed reading spreader

program.
299
spare 87
300
spare 88

failsafe mode.
Check spreader
program. If
problems persist
contact Bromma
301 WARNING RS485 not functioning as

intended
Depending on type of
sensor/device

Spreader
302 WARNING AnyBus not functioning as

intended
Depending on type of
sensor/device

Spreader
303 WARNING Error in locking AnyBus setup
Node ID
304 WARNING Timeout when trying to lock

AnyBus setup
305 WARNING Wrong node answered when locking AnyBus setup
306 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
Spreader properties
Number of containers
44
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
loaded/unloaded
307 WARNING AnyBus external bus failure
Version:
Page:
11
45(55)
308 WARNING AnyBus Status ok

309 WARNING AnyBus external bus ok
310 WARNING Wrong node answered when EEPROM setup
311 ERROR
Timeout when expecting answer from node on EEPROM
312 WARNING Spreader properties

318 WARNING Read EEPROM failure
319 WARNING Read NVRAM failure
320 WARNING EEPROM checksum failure
321 INFO
Spreader properties EEPROM

set ok
322 WARNING EEPROM set failure
323 INFO
Spreader properties EEPROM attached to new node
324 INFO
RS485 status ok
325 INFO
Gravity point to centre

command
Gravity point to left side
command
Gravity point to right side
command
Gravity point has reached the
centre position
326 INFO
327 INFO
328 INFO
329 INFO
330 INFO

left end stop
right endstop
.
.
.
331 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor wrap

.
around warning. Sensor too near
the value where it wraps around
and begins from zero again.
Manual
File: SCS_1
45
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
46(55)
.
332 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor has
wrapped around. The value has
gone from maximum to
minimum in one CPU cycle.
333 INFO
Added value to NVRAM
.
successfully
334 WARNING Spreader stop configuration
node that reported the problem
mismatch
335 WARNING Missed message on bus
regarding digital I/O
node from which an answer is expected

regarding analogue I/O

regarding encoder data

regarding AnyBus message

regarding RS485 data
340 WARNING No contact with the node for 3s. node from which an answer is expected
specified by the Sub code
341 ERROR
Error when trying to dowload

program
Node is missing on the bus
during system start.
343 ERROR
Inclination sensor initialisation

error
node that failed to initialise the sensor
344 ERROR
Timeout when trying to

node that failed to initialise the sensor
intitialise the inclination sensor
342 ERROR
node that is missing

regarding inclination sensor
346 INFO
347 INFO
Node bus communication ok.

BCAN ok
BCAN bus status warning.
348 WARNING BCAN bus communication off. .

349 ERROR
AnyBus Spreader/systems
diagnostic area failed to set up.
350 ERROR
Timeout when trying to set up

AnyBus Spreader/system
diagnostic area
AnyBus Assert diagnostic area
failed to set up
351 ERROR
352 ERROR
Manual
File: SCS_1
Timeout when trying to set up

AnyBus Assert diagnostic area.
46
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
353 INFO
Present nodes shown in sub code bitwise OR for all included nodes. 12bit Value
354 INFO
AnyBus slave card plugged in
357 INFO
AnyBus Input data area size
size of data area (bytes)
358 INFO
AnyBus output data area size
size of data area (bytes)
359 ERROR
Hardware initialisation failed

(system prog.)
psu_mon.=1, temp_sens.=2, realtime_clock=3
360 ERROR
NVRAM full. No space left for .

Storage
NVRAM checksum Error
.
Page:
47(55)
node ID holding the

card
355 INFO
AnyBus Master card plugged in node ID holding the
card
356 WARNING AnyBus card missing
node ID of the node missing the card
361 ERROR
362 ERROR
365 ERROR
OS code. Operating system fatal

error
OS subcode.Operating system
fatal error
OS extra.Operating system fatal
error
Local regulator (PID) failed.
366 ERROR
Local regulator (PID) timeout
367 ERROR
Error in interpreting the spreader .

program. Parameter mismatch
between system and ABE file.
363 ERROR
364 ERROR
code from OS
call Bromma
code from OS
call Bromma
code from OS
call Bromma
node ID that failed to

initialise the regulator
.
restart
368 ERROR
Error in recognising a
.
component downloaded with the
spreader program
.
369 WARNING Gravity point haven't reached
the requested position within
time limit.
regarding regulator data.
371 ERROR
Error in locking regulator setup .
372 INFO
The Spreader info has been set. The index of the field
which is set.
373 INFO
The Spreader info has been set. The value of the field
which is set. The
logged value is in the
range 0-9999. This
range limit has nothing
Manual
File: SCS_1
47
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
retstart
Check versions
of system and
ABE.
Check versions
of system and
ABE.
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
48(55)
to with the actual value

set in the Spreader info.
374 INFO
The time of day (minute) has

been set
Current value (minute) Message stored in log and displayed on

Spreader
375 INFO
Received a change bitrate

request. Boot message.
Requested bitrate
376 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor

values from left hook

Spreader
377 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor

values from right hook

Spreader
378 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed.

(start sequence)

handle start sequence.

Spreader

(download sequence)

download.

Spreader

(finish sequence)
node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on

handle finish sequence. Spreader
381 WARNING Disabeling outputs failed.

disable outputs.
382 WARNING No answer when attempting to

disable outputs.
383 WARNING Enabeling outputs faild.

Spreader
enabeling outputs.
384 WARNING No answer when attempting to

enabeling outputs.
385 INFO
Manual
File: SCS_1
AutoTuner stored in NVRAM

Spreader

Spreader
Spreader
Regulator index.
48
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51

teached
Version:
11
Page:
49(55)
386 INFO
Tandem - Teaching a predefined position

Spreader
387 INFO
Tandem - A command to store a

new value for a log position has
been received
388 INFO
Tandem - command to go to a
pre-defined position has been
received

requested

Spreader
389 INFO
Tandem - A command to return The ID of the position

to a log position has been
requested
received

Spreader

Spreader
390 WARNING Tandem - Cylinder position has The ID of the cylinder Message stored in log and displayed on
changed more than allowed.
Spreader
391 INFO
Tandem Both landside and

waterside spreaders enabled

Spreader
392 INFO
Tandem Landside spreader

enabled

Spreader
393 INFO
Tandem Waterside spreader

enabled

Spreader
394 INFO
TandemPush A push
command received

Spreader
395 INFO
TandemPush Inner position

reached.

Spreader
396 INFO
TELESCOPE Impact detected

Spreader
397 INFO
TELESCOPE Telescope is
autocorrecting

Spreader
398 WARNING TELESCOPE Sensor value is

out of range
Manual
File: SCS_1
49
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

Spreader
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
50(55)
399 INFO
TELESCOPE Bumped out of

signal window

Spreader
400 INFO
TWL TTDS active

Spreader
401 WARNING TWL Lock attempt with

TTDS active

Spreader
402 INFO
Digital I/O configured on an

AnybusGateway
Node id on where I/O

configured

Spreader
403 INFO
Analogue I/O configured on an

AnybusGateway

configured

Spreader
404 INFO
PWM configured on an
AnybusGateway

configured

Spreader
405 INFO
ASC Antisway sytem active

Spreader
406 INFO
ASC Antisway sytem ready

Spreader
407 INFO
ASC Antisway sytem failed

Spreaderi
408
spare 88
409 ERROR
OS extra 2.Operating system

fatal error
code from OS
call Bromma
410 INFO
Current hardware version
HW type
Type of hardware version.

5 = SCS2 revision
4 = SCS2
6 = Anybus gateway
The PID component found a strange
parameter saved in NVRAM. The PID
component uses the ABE parameters
instead.
411 WARNING Strange parameter saved in

NVRAM. (AutoTuner)
Manual
File: SCS_1
Parameter No.
50
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
412 WARNING Auto Tuner Finished but failed Parameter No.

to calculate some parameters
Version:
11
Page:
51(55)
Some parameters could not be calculated.

Check sensors etc.
413 ERROR
CANopen Failed to initialize

the software.
414 ERROR
CANopen Failed to configure

PDO
415 ERROR
CANopen - Error in locking

CANopen setup
416 INFO
CANopen Node removed from Node number

heartbeat list

Spreader
417 INFO
CANopen New node added to Node number

heart beat list

Spreader. See more specific literature
regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401]
418 INFO
CANopen Boot message

received from node
Node number

419 INFO
CANopen Node stopped
Node number

420 INFO
CANopen Node in operational Node number

state

421 INFO
CANopen Node in
preoperational state
Node number

422 WARNING CANopen Heartbeat failed on Node number

node

423 ERROR
CANopen To many slaves in

use

Spreader. Check spreader program.
424 ERROR
CANopen Failed to configure

SDO

Manual
File: SCS_1
Check spreader program
51
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
52(55)
425 WARNING CANopen Failed to send SDO Node number

426 WARNING CANopen Bus off occured

Spreader.
427 ERROR
CANopen Failed to change the

bitrate on CAN interface

Spreader.
428
Spare 89
429
Spare 90
430
Spare 91
431 WARNING CANopen Emergency object

additional byte 1
Contents of byte

additional byte 2
Contents of byte

additional byte 3
Contents of byte

additional byte 4
Contents of byte

additional byte 5
Contents of byte
436 INFO
Node number
CANopen Slave OK
437 WARNING CANopen Generic error
Manual
File: SCS_1
Node number
52
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51

regarding CANopen [DS 301, DS 401] and
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
slave user manual
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
53(55)
438 WARNING CANopen Current
Node number

439 WARNING CANopen Current, device

input side
Node number

440 WARNING CANopen Current, inside

device
Node number

441 WARNING CANopen Current, device

output side
Node number

442 WARNING CANopen - Voltage
Node number

443 WARNING CANopen Mains voltage
Node number

444 WARNING CANopen - Voltage inside
Node number

445 WARNING CANopen Voltage output
Node number

446 WARNING CANopen - Temperature
Node number

447 WARNING CANopen Temperature

ambient
Node number

448 WARNING CANopen Temperature device Node number

449 WARNING CANopen Hardware device
Node number

450 WARNING CANopen Software device
Node number

Manual
File: SCS_1
53
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
54(55)
451 WARNING CANopen Software inside
Node number

452 WARNING CANopen software user
Node number

453 WARNING CANopen Data set
Node number

454 WARNING CANopen Additional module Node number

455 WARNING CANopen - Monitoring
Node number

456 WARNING CANopen CAN overrun
Node number

457 WARNING CANopen CAN error passive Node number

458 WARNING CANopen Lifeguard or

heartbeat
Node number

459 WARNING CANopen Recover from bus

off
Node number

460 WARNING CANopen - Transmit COB id
Node number

461 WARNING CANopen General

communication
Node number

462 WARNING CANopen General protocol
Node number

463 WARNING CANopen PDO not processed Node number

Manual
File: SCS_1
54
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Document:
Project:
Project No
SCS2
Manual
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2004-12-08 13:51
Version:
11
Page:
55(55)
464 WARNING CANopen PDO length

exceeded
Node number

465 WARNING CANopen External error
Node number

466 WARNING CANopen Additional

functions
Node number

467 WARNING CANopen Device specific
Node number
468 WARNING CANopen Node missing
Node number

slave user manual
Check CAN connections and spreader
program.
469 INFO
Changed to node
number

Spreader.
470 WARNING CANopen Node id chage

failed
Node number

Spreader.
471 WARNING TTDS No sensors

Spreader
Manual
File: SCS_1
CANopen Node id changed
55
Printed: 2004-12-08 13:51
Spreader Control System

2
2:nd generation
SCS Anybus Gateway
Rev 1.0
05-03-08
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway

Date:
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
11
Page:
2(13)
General ......................................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 DICTIONARY AND ABBREVIATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 3
1.3 DOCUMENT LAYOUT ................................................................................................................................................ 3
Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.2 THE NODES .............................................................................................................................................................. 5
Software........................................................................................................................................................................ 5
3.1 BOOT PROGRAM ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.2 SYSTEM PROGRAM ................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.3 SPREADER PROGRAM ............................................................................................................................................... 6
Hardware Overview .................................................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 BCAN - STATUS LEDS ........................................................................................................................................... 6
4.2 THE ANY BUS CARD ................................................................................................................................................. 6
4.3 POWER CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 6
4.4 BCAN CONNECTOR ................................................................................................................................................. 7
4.5 NODE ADDRESS KEY SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................ 7
4.6 SERIAL PORT CONNECTOR ........................................................................................................................................ 7
4.7 GROUND CONNECTION ............................................................................................................................................. 7
4.8 FIELD BUS CONNECTIONS. ....................................................................................................................................... 8
4.8.1
Mapping of I/O .............................................................................................................................................. 8
4.9 FAULT FINDING TABLE........................................................................................................................................... 10
Software tools............................................................................................................................................................. 10
5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
5.2 ABE....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
5.3 BMS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................................. 11
6.1 DATA SHEET........................................................................................................................................................... 11
6.2 DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................................................................... 12
Appendix A (Error messages)................................................................................................................................... 13
Manual
File: SCS2 Anybus Gateway manual
2
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
11
Page:
3(13)
1 General
1.1
Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the those installing and using the Bromma SCS2 Anybus
Gateway. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.
1.2
Dictionary and abbreviations
ABE
BMS
Boot program
CAN
PWM
Spreader Program
SCS2
System Program
Anybus Gateway
1.3
Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic.

Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2.
The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the
loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly.
Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication.
Pulse Width Modulator.
The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2.
Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system
will be referred to as SCS2 in this document.
The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program.
A node that can be used in the Spreader Control System generation 2.
Document layout
Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2.

Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates.
Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2.
Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2.
Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2.
Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning (see main SCS2 manual for details).
Manual
3
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
11
Page:
4(13)
2 Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided
to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a
number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical
roughness.
Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough
Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface
that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single
control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are
simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable
architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money.
2.1
General
As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS
and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or
you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable
performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements:
Crane Node
A device directly interfacing with the cranes control systems, computer and
monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for
programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the
spreader node.
Crane-Spreader Communications Link
A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane

control system and the spreader.
Spreader Node
A device that interfaces directly with the spreaders sensorsand actuators.

One of the Spreader nodes normally acts as Master.
Sensors and Switches
Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.
The system is divided into several hardware blocks called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane.
The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the
number of I/O needed.
The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered
from 0 to 11 where:
0 is the master called B1
1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8
8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.
Manual
4
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
11
Page:
5(13)
Crane PLC
Crane field bus
Anybus Gateway A1
CAN network (BCAN)
B1 Master
I/O
B2 Slave
...
SCS2
B8 Slave
Spreader
Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally
via a CAN network.
2.2
The Nodes
The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master.
There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves.
The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master.
3 Sof
tware
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.
3.1
Boot Program
When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system.
During system Program updates it will take longer.
The Boot program is responsible for
Initialising hardware
Verifying that all system versions match.
Performing a program download
3.2
System program
After the Boot program is finished, the System will execute until the system is switched off. The System program is
responsible for
Interpreting the Spreader program (only on Master node)
Supporting any connected PC-connection via the RS232 port
Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages
Logging events in the event log
Reading input signals and writing output signals
Manual
5
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
3.3
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway

Date:
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
6(13)
Spreader Program
The Spreader Program is the specific application program that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see
chapter 5.2 for a brief description.
4 Hardware
Overview
Figure2 is a SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. The different parts are explained in the
following chapter. This view shows a Profibus card, this can naturally be exchanged for any other available fieldbus.
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
status LEDS
Status LEDs
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
address
selectors
Power connector
BCAN connector
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
terminator
switch
Node address key

switches
AnyBus
(Profibus) card
fieldbus
connector
Figure 2. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card.
4.1
BCAN - Status LEDs
There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status and one red LED indicating error
status.
Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute.
BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and flashing when the communication
interface is not working as inteded.
Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when configured and operating normaly.
Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.
4.2
The Any bus card
For details regarding the specific field bus card connection, termination, addressing and status LEDs, please see the
separate manual for that specific type of card.
4.3
Power connector
The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2-pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81).

Name
VCC
GND
Manual
Description
10 to 28 V DC
Ground
Pin number
1
2
6
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
4.4
Project No
Manual
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
11
Page:
7(13)
BCAN connector
The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3-pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81).

Name
CAN H
CAN L
CAN GND
4.5
Description
CAN high
CAN low
CAN ground, not required by BCAN
Pin number
1
2
3
Node address key switches
There are five switches selecting node address, where the DIP switch 1 corresponds to LSB.
The nodes are addressed according to the following table:
DIP setting
0=off, 1=on
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
10011-11110
11111
4.6
Node
name
Test
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B1
B1
B1
B2
B2
B2
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Not Used
Test
Spreader
stop
Redundancy block and override

of landing pins
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
The serial port connector is a standard DSUB 9-PIN female connector. A pin-to-pin cable is needed when connecting the
SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a computer serial port.
Name
Tx
Rx
Signal GND
CTS
RTS
Not connected
4.7
Description
Transmitted data RS-232
Received data RS-232
Ground
Clear to send RS-232
Request to send RS-232
Not connected
Pin number
2
3
5
7
8
1, 4, 6, 9
Ground connection
The SCS2 Anybus Gateway chassis must be properly connected to protective earth, for example by mounting the unit on a
grounded DIN rail.
Manual
7
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
4.8
Project No
Manual
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
8(13)
Field bus Connections.
By using the AnyBus the crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be
used as a Master bus for an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card
translates a number of different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change
between different buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a
specific bus, please view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project.
Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer
SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane. Hence the crane PLC and the AnyBus card must have corresponding
addresses and the nymber of bytes configured for input/output data have to be the same on both sides of the
communication link i.e. the crane PLC and the SCS2.
4.8.1
Mapping of I/O
OUT
IN
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
outputs
Byte 0-63
Project
specific
inputs
Output Segment
In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent
will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO,
WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented
each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value
of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.
Byte 0
Byte 1
Byte 2-3 (WORD)
Byte 4-5 (WORD)
Byte 6-7 (WORD)

=> Diagnostic code

way.
Byte 8
=> Node ID
Byte 9-10
Byte 11-16
Byte 17-18
=> sequential counter
Manual
8
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway

Date:
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
11
Page:
9(13)
These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
Input Segment
Manual
9
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
4.9
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
11
Page:
10(13)
Fault Finding table
Symptom
Power Supply
The node wont start. The power LED
is off.
RS-232
BMS system can not communicate
with the node.
CAN
The node can not communicate with
the other nodes.
Node ID
The unit stops at start-up.
5 Sof
Project No
Manual
What to do
Comment
Measure the main supply. The voltage

should exceed 10V DC and be less
than 30V DC.
The power LED should be on.
Probe TxD and RxD lines with

oscilloscope while trying to
communicate. Ensure that connection
cables arent damaged.
Data lines should show square waves

between 10V to +10V relative to
GND pin.
Probe bus lines with oscilloscope.

CAN high should show square waves
pointing downwards and CAN low
should be showing square waves
pointing upwards.
Check that CAN high and CAN low

are not mixed up.
Check selected node ID.
This can indicate that the node has

wrong id strapped telling the node to
participate in the system with wrong
role.
tware tools
5.1
Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given
below.
5.2
ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls
the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.
5.3
BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the
SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.
Manual
10
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
11
Page:
11(13)
6 Miscellaneous
6.1
Data sheet
Parameter
Note
Min
Max
Unit
Operating voltage
Current consumption
Temperature
EMC conformity
Power connector
Operating voltage 24 V DC
Operating temperature
In accordance with 89/336/EEC:
10
50
-20
28
200
+85
V DC
mA
0
C
EN 61000-6-4:2001 (Emission requirements)

EN 55011 (Radiated emission)
EN 61000-6-2:2001 (Immunity requirements)
EN 61000-4-2 (Immunity: ESD)
EN 61000-4-3 (Immunity: RF electromagnetic field)
EN 61000-4-4 (Immunity: Fast transients)
EN 61000-4-5 (Immunity: Surge) (2)
Controller
Memory
32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz

Program 1.4Mb
Log 128kb
Scan time
System scan time
50
ms
Node scan time
5
ms
Serial interfaces
BCAN Bromma CAN based bus
RS232 For PC communication
Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by
HMS.
Diagnostics
System diagnostics
Spreader functionality diagnostics
Event and error log
FB programming
Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.)
Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.)
Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.)
Spreader controller functions
Note 2) For compliance with EN 61000-6-2 the power cable and the serial port cable have to be limited to 10 meters in
length
Manual
11
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
Document:
Project:
Prepared by:
Andy Lewis
6.2
Project No
Manual
SCS Anybus Gateway

Date:
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
Page:
11
12(13)
Dimensions
Figure 3. The SCS2 Anybus Gateway node equiped with a Profibus slave card. All dimensions are in mm.
Manual
12
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
BrommaGroupManual
0-1-may02rev.00
BrommaConquip
Document:
Project:
SCS Anybus Gateway
Prepared by:
Date:
Andy Lewis
Project No
Manual
2005-03-08 10:41
Version:
11
Page:
13(13)
Appendix A (Error messages)
The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the
BMS). See main system manual for list of codes.
Manual
13
Printed: 05-03-08 10:41
11 Fault finding diagnostics

Fault finding in hydraulic system
NOISY PUMP OR EXCESSIVE HEAT
Check oil level and that filter is clean.
Check that pump is functioning correctly as illustrated in the "system test".
Particularly check that setting of pressure relief valves are correct (as
enclosed sheet) and that the pump suction line (inlet) is not blocked.
Pump suction is checked by removing drain line and measuring flow at
running pressure of 100 BAR.
Maximum flow should be 1 litre/min. If greater than this, replace the pump.
TWISTLOCKS DO NOT OPERATE
Check manual operation of the solenoid valve.
If twistlocks work then check electrical supply & solenoid.
NOTE! Blockading pin must be in the "up" position!
IF TWISTLOCKS DO NOT WORK

Check that pump pressure is correct.
Check pressure relief valve.
When valve is operated manually the pressure should remain at working
pressure. If it decreases check the seals in the cylinder.
Remove the cylinder and ensure that the twistlocks are free to rotate.
Check directional valve.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
11 01 ENG
rev.
Fault finding in electrical system

HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR STOPPED
Possible cause
3 phase supply missing.
Motor contactor not functioning.
Feed from crane missing.
Action______________
____
Check cable, plug, socket.
Check crane control signal.
Check connection.
HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR RUNS BUT KEEPS TRIPPING OUT

Possible cause
Action________________
__
Pump pressure too high or pump faulty. Refer to Hydraulic section.
Pump motor faulty.
Change motor.
Motor supply has one missing phase.
Check to find where supply is
connected and repair.
TWISTLOCKS WILL NOT LOCK/UNLOCK
Possible cause__________________
Pumps stopped.
Crane spreader is fitted with the safety
feature only work with all four landing
switches actuated.
If timer fitted timer faulty set wrongly.
Check if fault is hydraulic by
operating valve by hand.
Check supply to solenoid if yes.
Check leads and plugs to solenoids.
Check blockading circuit.
Check supply at B and C junction boxes.
FLIPPER WILL NOT OPERATE

Possible cause
Pump stopped.
Check if fault is mechanical or hydraulic
by operating valve by hand.
Check supply to solenoid if yes.
Check flipper supplies from crane.
Action________________
__
Check pump procedure.
Check that the spreader is correctly
landed on the container.
Replace or set to 0,5 or 2 sec.
Refer to hydraulic section.
Replace solenoid.
Repair or replace
Check relays, check limit switch and
adjust or replace. Check connection.
Check connections. Replace main
supply cable.
Action________________
__
Check pump procedure.
Carry out mechanical hydraulic
procedure.
Replace solenoid.
Check crane controls. Check plugs,
socket and cable.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
11 02 ENG
rev.
12 Appendices
Units & conversion tables
LENGTH
1 ft
1m
1 in
1 mm
= 0,3048 m
= 3,2808 ft
= 25,4 mm
= 0,03937 in
WEIGHT
1 lb
1 kg
1 ton
1 Lt
1 tonne
= 0,4536 kg
= 2,2046 lb
= 1 t = 2000 lb = 907 kg = 0,893 Lt= 0,907 tonne
= 2240 lb = 1016 kg = 1,016 tonne = 1,120 ton
= 1 mT = 2204 lb = 1000 kg = 0,9842 Lt = 1,103 ton
VOLUME
1l
= 0,21997 UKgal = 0,26417 USgal
PRESSURE
1 bar
= 10 N/cm2 = 1,02 Kp/cm2 = 14,503 lbf/in2
POWER
1 Hp
1 kW
= 0,746 kW
= 1,341 Hp
TORQUE
1 Kpm
= 9,81 Nm = 7,233 lbf
FORCE
1 Kgf = 1 kp = 9,81 N = 2,2046 lbf
TEMPERATURE
dgr C = 5 (dgr F-32)
9
A = ampere
o
C = degrees centigrade
c/s = cycles per second
o
F = degrees Fahrenheit
ft = foot
gal = gallon
Hp = horse power
Hz = hertz
in = inch
kg = kilogramme
Kgf = kilopond force
l = litre
lb = pound
lbf= pound force
m = meter
min= minute
n = newton
s = second
t = tonne
v = volt
w = watt
m = micron
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
12 01 ENG
rev.
13 Accessories
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
12 01 ENG
rev.
Bromma Group Manual
BGS Accessories
H.I.S. Height Indication
System
37991 115/230 V AC
37993 24V DC
37992 115/230 V AC PLC

37994 24V DC
PLC
8-1- Oct. 02 rev.00
Bromma Conquip
Bromma Group Manual
Description
The system is based on ultrasonic sensors and is generally
used for indication to the crane pilot that the spreader is
approaching a container, or slowing the hoist down as the
spreader descends upon a container.
Two sensors have been chosen for redundancy and the
indicating signal is triggered if either of the sensors detect an
object below the spreader. The sensors are of two different
models and cannot interfere with each others operating
frequencies.
The range of the system is configurable (0,5-4 m) by setting
the sensors at the desired operating range to suit the ramp of
the hoist on the current crane.
Logic and redundancy can be located in the spreader or crane
PLC. In a case were an existing PLC is to be used, Bromma
will supply the block logic as a programming guideline. If no
PLC is available a heavy-duty controller can be provided for
this purpose.
The ultrasonic sensors are 24V DC and a power supply is
included for 115V AC and 230V AC systems.
Sensor
Main
frame
Short
distance
position
Setting Crane slow speed

Crane slow speed: 10% of maximum speed or max 0.3m/s.
It is recommended to use the full sensing range of the sensors.
This distance can however be reduced based on experience
for each specific case.
Long
distance
position
Setting Switch Points

The two sensors are from different manufacturers, therefore
the method of setting the switch points is different.
Sensor 1.1 (79579)
This sensor is provided with a switching output with two
programmable switch points. They are set by applying -24V
for the long distance position or +24V for the short distance
position to the teaching input (pin no. 2 in sensor socket) for at
least 1 second.
The distance is programmed by holding a 100 mm by 100 mm
metal target in front of the sensor at the desired distance and
applying the proper voltage to Pin 2. The LED on the top of
the sensor indicates that the set point has been properly stored.
Bromma Conquip
8-2- Oct. 02 rev.00
LED on top
of sensor
Pins in sensor socket

(Valid for both types)
Bromma Group Manual
Sensor 2.1 (79580)

This sensor is equipped with two controls, P1 and P2.
The short distance position is set by P1 and the long distance
position by P2. LEDs located on the sensor indicate when the
target is detected.
Controls P1
and P2
For both sensors the long distance position should be set to

approximately 3 m (depending on crane type).
The short distance should be set as short as possible and by all
means kept above the bottom of the main frame.
Technical specifications
Sensor
79579 (FA)
79580 (SB)
Operating voltage
20-30 V DC
20-30 V DC
< 60mA
< 50mA
Transducer frequency
approx .85 kHz
approx .120 kHz
Detection range
500-4000 mm
400-3000 mm
IP65
IP65
Operating temp. range
-25o C... +70o C
-25o C ... +70o C
Storage temp. range
-40o C... +85o C
-40o C... +85o C
Rated operating current
Protection class to
DIN40 050
Spare parts
See chapter 6.3 Electrical system
8-3- Oct. 02 rev.00
Bromma Conquip
Bromma Group Manual
Bromma Conquip
8-4- Oct. 02 rev.00
Bromma Group Manual
BGS Accessories
Twistlock Counter
70782(230V), 70781(115V),
76140(24V)
Application
In order to maintain the correct service intervals a twistlock
counter can be mounted in the electric cabinet. The counter is
mounted directly on a rail.
Function
The twistlock counter is connected together with the twistlock
locked signal. (see chapt. 6.3 Electrical system). When the twistlock locked sensors gives a positve and a negative pulse the
counter increments one step. The counter cannot be reset. When
it reaches its maximum (9999999 pulses) it restarts from 0.
Technical specifications
Counter
Operating Voltage
70782
70781
70873
230V AC
115V AC
24V DC
Numerals
1.5 x 3.5 mm
Voltage tolerance
+ 10 %
Frequency
50 Hz
__
60 Hz
__
Power consumption
Protection
Ambient temperature
- 20oC to
+70oC
Weight
Front
35x45 mm
8-1- Oct. 02 rev.00
Bromma Conquip
Bromma Group Manual
Bromma Conquip
8-2-J Oct. 02 rev.00

Bromma EH5U Eng 00

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bromma EH5U Eng 00

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operations manual

READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS

Bromma Conquip AB or its affiliated - companies (to the extent permitted

If in doubt always refer to the original equipment manufacturer.

Refer at all time to the Safety precautions under section 5!

In the event You should need additional information or support, our

5. Telescoping of the spreader is prevented unless all four blockading pins

4 Testing records and certificates

READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PUT

10. Maintain adjustment of all electrical and hydraulic components

11 Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6).

TOWER FUNCTIONS AND TESTING

Start - Up the spreader

TWISTLOCK (drg no 22808)

TWISTLOCK CYLINDER & BEARING HOUSING IN TOWER (drg no 22808)

HYDRAULIC UNIT (drg no 22809)

OIL FILTER (drg no 22809)

LIFTING SHAFTS (drg no 22808)

GLIDE PLATE (drg no 22810)

GUIDE ARMS (drg no 22808)

TELESCOPIC GEARBOX (drg no 22808 & 22809)

ALL ROLLER CHAINS AND TENSION WHEEL (drg no 22808)

SIGNAL LAMPS (drg no 22810)

TELESCOPIC BEAMS (drg no 22808)

ELECTRICAL MOTORS (Only for EH5)

Material / Article No.

M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694

Material / Article No.

M6S 6x55, Art. No. was 75694

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

1. Twistlock: Check the nut and the floating

3. Check that the hydraulic pump pressure is correct.

2. Inspect all parts. Look for any damage which

3. Check that there are no cracks (or other faults)

5. Clean all parts.

Every 6000 working hours (200,000 containers handled4 or every other

If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter

PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR

ADJUSTING THE TELESCOPIC CHAIN

REPLACING A BROKEN CHAIN

REPLACING ROBALON PLATES

Telescopic beam lower plates

Telescopic beam upper plates

DISMANTLING THE TELESCOPIC BEAMS AND END BEAM UNIT

5. Secure a spacer between the telescopic beams to prevent lateral

FLIPPER ARM UNIT (AUTOMATIC FLIPPER ARMS)

ADJUSTING SPREADER LENGTH

SPREADER LENGTH WITH TWISTLOCKS

ADJUSTING THE LANDING PIN

d) If the distance is not correct,

e) Proceed in the same way for all four corners.

Distance between top of twistlock head

Checking the Float

Removing the Twistlock Cylinder

Checking the tower motor brake

Important tightening torques EH5/EH170

7-1- Febr. 10 rev.01

Limit switch box

Flipper motor and gearbox

Inspection and maintenance periods

Inspection and Maintenance

Inspection and maintenance periods

BMG4 =Telescopic Motor